Danfoss aqua drive, error 413

danfoss aqua drive, error 413

circuiting, ground fault and overload. General Control Principles – VLT® 8000 AQUA and The VLT 8000 AQUA and VLT 5000 Series of Danfoss AFDs control. Section 6.3 Manufacturers Manuals 6.3.31 Danfoss VLT Aquadrive FC200) Vendor Manual AMA before the adjustable frequency drive entered alarm mode. VLT® AQUA Drive FC 200 Cascade Controller MI. 38.Cx.yy An electronic fault, temporary overload, a fault in outputSpeedHighLimit (P413). All set-ups.

Commit error: Danfoss aqua drive, error 413

Softice error 31
PARSE ERROR SYNTAX ERROR UNEXPECTED END
501 domain must resolve error
TRAUMATISMO Y TERROR
Error 2350 fdi server error

Danfoss aqua drive, error 413 - confirm

Danfoss VLT AutomationDrive FC 360 Quick Manual

Download Manual  of Danfoss VLT AutomationDrive FC 360 Controller, Control Unit for Free or View it Online on All-Guides.com.

Thefrequencyconvertermonitorstheconditionofits
inputpower,output,andmotorfactorsaswellasother
systemperformanceindicators.Awarningoralarmmay
notnecessarilyindicateaprobleminternaltothe
frequencyconverteritself.Inmanycases,itindicatesfailure
conditionsfrominputvoltage,motorloadortemperature,
externalsignals,orotherareasmonitoredbythefrequency
converter’sinternallogic.Besuretoinvestigatethoseareas
exteriortothefrequencyconverterasindicatedinthe
6.2 Warning and Alarm Types
Awarningisissuedwhenanalarmconditionisimpending
orwhenanabnormaloperatingconditionispresentand
mayresultinthefrequencyconverterissuinganalarm.A
warningclearsbyitselfwhentheabnormalconditionis
AlarmTripvs.AlarmTripLock
Analarmisissuedwhenthefrequencyconverteris
tripped,thatis,thefrequencyconvertersuspends
operationtopreventfrequencyconverterorsystem
damage.Themotorwillcoasttoastop.Thefrequency
converterlogicwillcontinuetooperateandmonitorthe
frequencyconverterstatus.Afterthefaultconditionis
remedied,thefrequencyconvertercanbereset.Itwill
thenbereadytostartoperationagain.
Atripcanberesetinanyof4ways:
Digitalresetinputcommand
Serialcommunicationresetinputcommand
Veryseriousfaultscausealarmswithtriplockwhich
requirethatinputpowerbecycledbeforeresettingthe
alarminanyofthe4waysdescribedabove.
Warning and Alarm Displays
Illustration6.1WarningandAlarmDisplays
Analarmortrip-lockalarmwillflashondisplayalongwith
Illustration6.2Alarm/TripLockAlarm
Inadditiontothetextandalarmcodeonthefrequency
converterdisplay,therearethreestatusindicatorlights.
Illustration6.3StatusIndicatorLights
AutomationDrive FC 360 Quick Guide
is a registered Danfoss trademark31

1 MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE VLT AQUA Drive FC 200

2 VLT AQUA Drive Contents Contents 1 How to Read this 1-1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights 1-2 Approvals 1-3 Symbols Safety 2-1 General Warning 2-2 Before Commencing Repair Work 2-2 Special Conditions 2-2 Caution 2-2 Avoid Unintended Start 2-3 IT Line Power 2-3 Safe Stop of the Adjustable Frequency Drive (optional) Introduction 3-1 Type Code String - Medium Power Mechanical Installation 4-1 Before Starting Electrical Installation 5-1 How to Connect 5-1 Line Power Wiring Overview 5-3 Motor Wiring Overview 5-10 DC Bus Connection 5-15 Brake Connection Option 5-16 Relay Connection 5-17 Electrical Installation and Control Cables 5-23 How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation Commissioning and Application Examples 6-1 Quick Set-up 6-1 Start/Stop 6-2 Closed-loop Wiring 6-2 Submersible Pump Application How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7-1 Ways of Operation 7-1 How to Operate the Graphical LCP (GLCP) 7-1 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

3 Contents VLT AQUA Drive How to Operate the Numeric LCP (NLCP) 7-5 Tips and Tricks How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 8-1 How to Program 8-1 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations 8-6 Main Menu 8-6 Parameter Options 8-44 Default Settings 8-44 Operation/Display 0-** 8-45 Load/Motor 1-** 8-47 Brakes 2-** 8-49 Reference / Ramps 3-** 8-50 Limits / Warnings 4-** 8-51 Digital In/Out 5-** 8-52 Analog In/Out 6-** 8-53 Comm. and Options 8-** 8-54 Profibus 9-** 8-55 CAN Fieldbus 10-** 8-56 Smart Logic 13-** 8-57 Special Functions 14-** 8-58 Adj. Freq. Drive Information 15-** 8-59 Data Readouts 16-** 8-61 Data Readouts 2 18-** 8-63 Adj. Freq. Drive Closed-loop 20-** 8-64 Ext. Closed-loop 21-** 8-65 Application Functions 22-** 8-67 Timed Actions 23-** 8-69 Cascade Controller 25-** 8-70 Analog I/O Option MCB ** 8-72 Water Application Functions 29-** 8-75 Bypass Option 31-** Troubleshooting 9-1 Fault Messages Specifications 10-1 General Specifications 10-1 Special Conditions MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

4 VLT AQUA Drive Contents 11 Index 11-1 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

5 Contents VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

6 VLT AQUA Drive 1 How to Read this 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Series Software version: This guide can be used with all FC 200 adjustable frequency drives with software version 1.33 or later. The current software version number can be read from par Software Version. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1-1

7 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights This publication contains information proprietary to Danfoss. By accepting and using this manual, the user agrees that the information contained herein will be used solely for operating equipment from Danfoss or equipment from other vendors provided that such equipment is intended for communication with Danfoss equipment over a serial communication link. This publication is protected under the copyright laws of Denmark and most other countries. Danfoss does not warrant that a software program produced according to the guidelines provided in this manual will function properly in every physical, hardware or software environment. Although Danfoss has tested and reviewed the documentation within this manual, Danfoss makes no warranty or representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect to this documentation, including its quality, performance, or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall Danfoss be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of the use, or the inability to use information contained in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. In particular, Danfoss is not responsible for any costs, including but not limited to those incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage of equipment, loss of computer programs, loss of data, the costs to substitute these, or any claims by third parties. Danfoss reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its contents without prior notice or any obligation to notify former or present users of such revisions or changes Available Literature for VLT AQUA DriveFC VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.Mx.yy provides the neccessary information for getting the drive up and running. - VLT AQUA Drive High Power MG.20.Px.yy provides the neccessary information for getting the HP drive up and running. - VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide MG.20.Nx.yy contains all the technical information about the drive and customer design and applications. - VLT AQUA Drive Programming Guide MN.20.Ox.yy provides information on how to program and includes complete parameter descriptions. - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Profibus MG.33.Cx.yy - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 DeviceNet MG.33.Dx.yy - Output Filters Design Guide MG.90.Nx.yy - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Cascade Controller MI.38.Cx.yy - Application Note MN20A102: Submersible Pump Application - Application Note MN20B102: Master/Follower Operation Application - Application Note MN20F102: Drive Closed-loop and Sleep Mode - Instruction MI.38.Bx.yy: Installation Instruction for Mounting Brackets Enclosure type A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2 IP21, IP55 or IP66 - Instruction MI.90.Lx.yy: Analog I/O Option MCB109 - Instruction MI.33.Hx.yy: Panel through mount kit x = Revision number yy = Language code Danfoss technical literature is also available online at MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

8 VLT AQUA Drive 1 How to Read this Approvals Symbols Symbols used in this. NOTE! Indicates something to be noted by the reader. Indicates a general warning. Indicates a high-voltage warning. Indicates a default setting MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1-3

9 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

10 VLT AQUA Drive 2 Safety 2Safety Safety Note The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever connected to line power. Incorrect installation of the motor, adjustable frequency drive or serial communication bus may cause damage to the equipment, serious personal injury or death. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as national and local rules and safety regulations, must be complied with. 2 Safety Regulations 1. The adjustable frequency drive must be disconnected from line power if repair work is to be carried out. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before removing motor and line power plugs. 2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the control panel of the adjustable frequency drive does not disconnect the equipment from line power and is thus not to be used as a safety switch. 3. Correct protective grounding of the equipment must be established, the user must be protected against supply voltage, and the motor must be protected against overload in accordance with applicable national and local regulations. 4. The ground leakage currents are higher than 3.5 ma. 5. Protection against motor overload is set by par Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is desired, set par to data value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value [ETR warning]. Note: The function is initialized at 1.16 x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. For the North American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC. 6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line power supply while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before removing motor and line power plugs. 7. Please note that the adjustable frequency drive has more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3 when load sharing (linking of the DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V DC have been installed. Make sure that all voltage inputs have been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before commencing repair work. Installation at High Altitudes Installation at high altitude: V: At altitudes above 10,000 ft [3 km], please contact Danfoss Drives regarding PELV V: At altitudes above 6,600 ft [2 km], please contact Danfoss Drives regarding PELV. Warning against Unintended Start 1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local stop, while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. If personal safety considerations make it necessary to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stop functions are not sufficient. 2. While parameters are being changed, the motor may start. Consequently, the stop key [RESET] must always be activated; following which data can be modified. 3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults occur in the electronics of the adjustable frequency drive, or if a temporary overload or a fault in the supply line power or the motor connection ceases. Warning: Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has been disconnected from line power. Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing (linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic backup. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 2-1

11 2 Safety VLT AQUA Drive General Warning 2 Leakage Current The ground leakage current from the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 exceeds 3.5 ma. According to IEC , a reinforced protective ground connection must be ensured by means of: a min in² [10 mm²] Cu or in² [16 mm²] Al PE-wire, or an additional PE wire - with the same cable cross-section as the line power wiring - must be terminated separately. Residual Current Device This product can cause DC current in the protective conductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is used for extra protection, only an RCD of Type B (time delayed) shall be used on the supply side of this product. See also RCD Application Note MN.90.GX.02. Protective grounding of the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 and the use of RCDs must always follow national and local regulations Before Commencing Repair Work 1. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power. 2. Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and Wait at least the time mentioned above in the section General Warning. 4. Remove motor cable Special Conditions Electrical Ratings: The rating indicated on the nameplate of the adjustable frequency drive is based on a typical 3-phase line power supply within the specified voltage, current and temperature ranges, which are expected to be used in most applications. The adjustable frequency drives also support other special applications, which affect the electrical ratings of the adjustable frequency drive. Special conditions that affect the electrical ratings might be: Single phase applications. High temperature applications which require derating of the electrical ratings Marine applications with more severe environmental conditions. Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide for information about the electrical ratings. Installation requirements: The overall electrical safety of the adjustable frequency drive requires special installation considerations regarding: Fuses and circuit breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit protection Selection of power cables (line power, motor, brake, load sharing and relay) Grid configuration (IT,TN, grounded leg, etc.) Safety of low-voltage ports (PELV conditions). Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide for information about the installation requirements Caution The adjustable frequency drive DC link capacitors remain charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid an electrical shock hazard, disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power before carrying out maintenance. Wait at least as follows before doing service on the adjustable frequency drive: 2-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

12 VLT AQUA Drive 2 Safety Voltage (V) Min. Waiting Time (Minutes) hp [ kw] hp [ kw] hp [ kw] hp [0.75 kw 7.5 kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [ kw] Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even when the LEDs are turned off Avoid Unintended Start NOTE! While the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power, the motor can be started/stopped using digital commands, bus commands, references or via the Local Control Panel. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power whenever personal safety considerations make it necessary to avoid an unintended start. To avoid unintended start, always activate the [OFF] key before changing parameters. Unless terminal 37 is turned off, an electronic fault, temporary overload, a fault in the line power supply, or lost motor connection may cause a stopped motor to start IT Line Power IT line power Do not connect adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and ground of more than 440 V for 400 V drives and 760 V for 690 V drives. For 400 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and ground. For 690 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 760 V between phase and ground. par RFI 1 can be used to disconnect the internal RFI capacitors from the RFI filter to ground Disposal Instructions Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together with domestic waste. It must be separately collected with electrical and electronic waste according to local and currently valid legislation. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 2-3

13 2 Safety VLT AQUA Drive Safe Stop of the Adjustable Frequency Drive (optional) 2 For versions fitted with a safe stop terminal 37 input, the adjustable frequency drive can perform the safety function Safe Torque Off (As defined by draft CD IEC ) or Stop Category 0 (as defined in EN ). It is designed and deemed suitable for the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN This function is called safe stop. Prior to integrating and using safe stop in an installation, a thorough risk analysis must be carried out on the installation in order to determine whether the safe stop functionality and safety category are appropriate and sufficient. In order to install and use the Safe Stop function in accordance with the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1, the related information and instructions of the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide MG.20.NX.YY must be followed! The information and instructions contained in the are not sufficient for a correct and safe use of the safe stop functionality! 2-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

14 VLT AQUA Drive 3 Introduction 3Introduction Type Code String - Medium Power 3 Description Pos.: Possible choice Product group & VLT Series 1-6 FC 202 Power rating hp [ kw] Number of phases 11 Three phases (T) AC line voltage S2: V AC single phase S4: V AC single phase T 2: V AC T 4: V AC T 6: V AC T 7: V AC Enclosure E20: IP20 E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1 E55: IP 55/NEMA Type 12 E2M: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/ line power shield E5M: IP 55/NEMA Type 12 w/ line power shield E66: IP66 F21: IP21 kit without backplate G21: IP21 kit with backplate P20: IP20/chassis with backplate P21: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/ backplate P55: IP55/NEMA Type 12 w/ backplate RFI filter HX: No RFI filter H1: RFI filter class A1/B H2: RFI filter class A2 H3: RFI filter class A1/B (reduced cable length) H4: RFI filter class A2/A1 Brake 18 X: No brake chopper included B: Brake chopper included T: Safe Stop U: Safe + brake Display 19 G: Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP) N: Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP) X: No Local Control Panel Coating PCB 20 X. No coated PCB C: Coated PCB Line power option 21 D: Loadsharing X: No line power disconnect switch 8: Line Power Disconnect + Loadsharing Cable entries 22 X: Standard cable entries O: European metric thread in cable entries 23 Reserved Software release Current software version Software language 28 Table 3.1: Type code description. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3-1

15 3 Introduction VLT AQUA Drive 3 Description Pos.: Possible choice A options AX: No options A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1 A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet AN: MCA 121 Ethernet IP B options BX: No option BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option BP: MCB 105 Relay option BO:MCB 109 Analog I/O option BY: MCO 101 Extended Cascade Control C0 options CX: No options C1 options 35 X: No options 5: MCO 102 Advanced Cascade Control C option software XX: Standard software D options DX: No option D0: DC backup The various options are described further in this Design Guide. Table 3.2: Type code description. 3-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

16 VLT AQUA Drive 3 Introduction Adjustable Frequency Drive Identification Below is an example of an identification label. This label is situated on the adjustable frequency drive and shows the type and the options with which the unit is equipped. See table 2.1 for details of how to read thetype code string (T/C). 3 Figure 3.1: This example shows an identification label for the VLT AQUA Drive. Please have T/C (type code) number and serial number ready before contacting Danfoss Abbreviations and Standards Abbreviations: Terms: SI units: I-P units: a Acceleration m/s 2 ft/s 2 AWG American wire gauge Auto Tune Automatic Motor Tuning C Celsius I Current A Amp ILIM Current limit Joule Energy J = N m ft-lb, Btu F Fahrenheit FC Adjustable Frequency Drive f Frequency Hz Hz khz Kilohertz khz khz LCP Local Control Panel ma Milliampere ms Millisecond min Minute MCT Motion Control Tool M-TYPE Motor Type Dependent Nm Newton meters in-lbs IM,N Nominal motor current fm,n Nominal motor frequency PM,N Nominal motor power UM,N Nominal motor voltage par. Parameter PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Watt Power W Btu/hr, hp Pascal Pressure Pa = N/m² psi, psf, ft of water IINV Rated Inverter Output Current RPM Revolutions Per Minute SR Size Related T Temperature C F t Time s s, hr TLIM Torque limit U Voltage V V Table 3.3: Abbreviation and standards table. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3-3

17 3 Introduction VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

18 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation 4 Mechanical Installation 4.1 Before Starting Checklist When unpacking the adjustable frequency drive, make sure that the unit is undamaged and complete. Use the following table to identify the packaging: Enclosure type: A2 (IP 20/ 21) A3 (IP 20/21) A5 (IP 55/ 66) B1/B3 (IP20/ 21/ 55/ 66) B2/B4 (IP20/ 21/ 55/66) C1/C3 (IP20/21/ 55/66) C2/C4 (IP20/21/ 55/66) 4 Unit size (kw): V / / / / V / / / / V / / / / V / / - -/ / - Table 4.1: Unpacking table MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-1

19 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Please note that a selection of screwdrivers (phillips or cross-thread screwdriver and torx), a side-cutter, drill and knife is also recommended to have handy for unpacking and mounting the adjustable frequency drive. The packaging for these enclosures contains, as shown: accessory bag(s), documentation and the unit. Depending on options fitted, there may be one or two bags and one or more booklets MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

20 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Front Views A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 IP20/21* IP20/21* IP55/66 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21* IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21* Figure 4.2: Top and bottom mounting holes. (B4+C3+C4 only) Figure 4.1: Top and bottom mounting holes. Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the drives upon delivery. All measurements in mm. * IP21 can be established with a kit as described in the section: IP 21/ IP 4X/ TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit in the Design Guide. 4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-3

21 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Mechanical Dimensions Mechanical dimensions Frame size (kw): A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C Chassis V T V T V T V T IP /66 21/ 55/66 21/55/ /55/66 21/55/66 20 NEMA Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Chassis Chassis Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Chassis Height (mm) Enclosure A** with de-coupling plate A Backplate A Distance between mount. holes a Width (mm) Enclosure B With one C option B Backplate B Distance between mount. holes b Depth (mm) Without option A/B C With option A/B C* Screw holes (mm) c Diameter ø d Diameter ø e f Max weight (kg) * Depth of enclosure will vary with different options installed. ** The free space requirements are above and below the bare enclosure height measurement A. See section for further information. 4-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

22 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Mounting All IP20 enclosure sizes as well as IP21/ IP55 enclosure sizes except A2 and A3 allow side-by-side installation. If the IP 21 Enclosure kit (130B1122 or 130B1123) is used on enclosure A2 or A3,, there must be a minimum of 2 in [50 mm] of clearance between drives. For optimal cooling conditions, allow a free air passage above and below the adjustable frequency drive. See table below. Air passage for different enclosures 4 Enclosure: A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 a (mm): b (mm): Drill holes in accordance with the measurements given. 2. You must provide screws suitable for the surface on which you want to mount the adjustable frequency drive. Re-tighten all four screws. Table 4.2: Mounting frame sizes A5, B1, B2, B3, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4 on a non-solid back wall, the drive must be provided with a backplate A due to insufficient cooling air over the heatsink. For heavier drives (B4, C3, C4), use a lift. First wall-mount the 2 lower bolts, then lift the drive onto the lower bolts. Finally, fasten the drive against the wall with the 2 top bolts. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-5

23 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Safety Requirements for Mechanical Installation Pay attention to the requirements that apply to integration and the field mounting kit. Follow the information in the list to avoid serious damage or injury, especially when installing large units. 4 The adjustable frequency drive is cooled by air circulation. To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensured that the ambient temperature does not exceed the maximum temperature stated for the adjustable frequency drive, and that the 24-hour average temperature is not exceeded. Locate the maximum temperature and 24-hour average in the paragraph Derating for Ambient Temperature. If the ambient temperature is in the range of F [45 55 C], derating of the adjustable frequency drive will become relevant, see Derating for Ambient Temperature. The service life of the adjustable frequency drive is reduced if derating for ambient temperature is not taken into account Field Mounting For field mounting the IP 21/IP 4X top/,type 1 kits or IP 54/55 units are recommended Panel Through Mounting A Panel Through Mount Kit is available for adjustable frequency drive series, VLT Aqua Drive and. In order to increase heatsink cooling and reduce panel depth, the adjustable frequency drive may be mounted in a through panel. Furthermore, the builtin fan can then be removed. The kit is available for enclosures A5 through C2. NOTE! This kit cannot be used with cast front covers. No cover or IP21 plastic cover must be used instead. Information on ordering numbers is found in the Design Guide, section Ordering Numbers. More detailed information is available in the Panel Through Mount Kit instruction, MI.33.H1.YY, where yy=language code. 4-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

24 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation 5 Electrical Installation 5.1 How to Connect Cables General NOTE! Always comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections. Details of terminal tightening torques. Power (kw) Torque (Nm) Enclosure V V V Line power Motor DC connection Brake Ground Relay A A A B B ) 4.5 2) B B C C2 C3 C Table 5.1: Tightening of terminals 1. For different cable dimensions x/y where x in 2 [95 mm 2 ] and y in 2 [95 mm 2 ]. 2. Cable dimensions above 25 hp [18.5 kw] in 2 [35 mm 2 ] and below 30 hp [22 kw] in 2 [10 mm 2 ] Grounding and IT Line Power The ground connection cable cross-section must be at least in 2 [10 mm 2 ]or 2 rated line power wires terminated separately according to EN or IEC unless national regulations specify differently. Always comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections. The line power is connected to the main disconnect switch if this is included. NOTE! Make sure that the AC line voltage corresponds to the AC line voltage of the adjustable frequency drive nameplate. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-1

25 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Figure 5.1: Terminals for line power and grounding. 5 IT Line Power Do not connect 400 V adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and ground of more than 440 V. For IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and ground. 5-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

26 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Line Power Wiring Overview C4 (IP20) C3 (IP 20) C2 (IP 21/IP 55/66) C1 (IP 21/IP 55/66) B4 (IP 20) B3 (IP 20) B2 (IP 21/IP 55/IP 66) B1 (IP 21/IP 55/IP 66) A5 (IP 55/IP 66) A3 (IP 20/IP 21) A2 (IP 20/IP 21) Enclosure: 130BA Motor size (kw): V V V ' V Goto: Table 5.2: Line Power Wiring Table. 5 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-3

27 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for A2 and A3 5 Figure 5.2: First mount the two screws on the mounting plate, slide it into place and tighten fully. Figure 5.3: When mounting cables, first mount and tighten ground cable. The ground connection cable cross-section must be at least in 2 [10 mm 2 ] or 2 rated line power wires terminated separately according to EN 50178/IEC MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

28 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation 5 Figure 5.4: Then mount line power plug and tighten wires. Figure 5.5: Finally, tighten support bracket on line power wires. NOTE! With single phase A3 use L1 and L2 terminals. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-5

29 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for A5 5 Figure 5.6: How to connect to line power and grounding without a line power disconnect switch. Note that a cable clamp is used. Figure 5.7: How to connect to line power and grounding with a line power disconnect switch. NOTE! With single phase A5 use L1 and L2 terminals. 5-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

30 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation AC Line Input Connections for B1, B2 and B3 5 Figure 5.9: How to connect to line power and grounding for B3 without RFI. Figure 5.8: How to connect to line power and grounding for B1 and B2 Figure 5.10: How to connect to line power and grounding for B3 with RFI. NOTE! With single phase B1 use L1 and L2 terminals. NOTE! For correct cable dimensions, please see the section General Specifications at the back of this manual. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-7

31 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for B4, C1 and C2 5 Figure 5.11: How to connect to line power and grounding for B4. Figure 5.12: How to connect to line power and grounding for C1 and C AC Line Input Connections for C3 and C4 Figure 5.13: How to connect C3 to line power and grounding. Figure 5.14: How to connect C4 to line power and grounding How to Connect Motor - Introduction See section General Specifications for correct dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and length. Use a shielded/armored motor cable to comply with EMC emission specifications (or install the cable in a metal conduit). Keep the motor cable as short as possible to reduce the noise level and leakage currents. Connect the motor cable shield/armor to both the decoupling plate of the adjustable frequency drive and to the metal of the motor. (The same applies to both ends of the metal conduit if used instead of a shield.) 5-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

32 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Make the shield connections with the largest possible surface area (by using a cable clamp or an EMC cable connector). This is done by using the supplied installation devices in the adjustable frequency drive. Avoid terminating the shield by twisting the ends (pigtails), as this will spoil high frequency shielding effects. If it is necessary to break the continuity of the shield to install a motor isolator or motor relay, the continuity must be maintained with the lowest possible HF impedance. Cable length and cross-section The adjustable frequency drive has been tested with a given length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. If the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance - and thus the leakage current - may increase, thereby requiring that the cable length is reduced accordingly. Switching frequency When adjustable frequency drives are used together with sine wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the switching frequency must be set according to the sine wave filter instructions in par Switching Frequency. Precautions while using aluminum conductors Aluminum conductors are not recommended for cable cross-sections less than in² [35 mm²]. Terminals can accept aluminum conductors, but the conductor surface has to be clean, oxidation must be removed, and the area must be sealed by neutral acid-free Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected. Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after two days due to the softness of the aluminum. It is crucial to ensure that the connection makes a gas tight joint, otherwise the aluminum surface will oxidize again. 5 All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can be connected to the adjustable frequency drive. Normally, small motors are star-connected (230/400 V, D/Y). Large motors are delta-connected (400/690 V, D/Y). Refer to the motor nameplate for correct connection mode and voltage. Figure 5.15: Terminals for motor connection NOTE! In motors without phase insulation paper or other insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with the voltage supply (such as an adjustable frequency drive), fit a sine-wave filter on the output of the adjustable frequency drive. (Motors that comply with IEC do not require a sine-wave filter). No Motor voltage 0 100% of AC line voltage. U V W 3 cables out of motor U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 6 cables out of motor, Delta-connected U1 V1 W1 6 cables out of motor, Star-connected U2, V2, W2 to be interconnected separately (optional terminal block) No. 99 Ground connection PE Table 5.3: 3 and 6 cable motor connection. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-9

33 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Wiring Overview C4 (IP20) C3 (IP 20) C2 (IP 21/IP 55/66) C1 (IP 21/IP 55/66) B4 (IP 20) B3 (IP 20) B2 (IP 21/IP 55/ IP 66) B1 (IP 21/IP 55/ IP 66) A5 (IP 55/IP 66) A3 (IP 20/IP 21) A2 (IP 20/IP 21) Enclosure: Motor size (kw): V V V V Goto: Table 5.4: Motor Wiring Table MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

34 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Motor Connection for A2 and A3 Follow these drawings step-by-step for connecting the motor to the adjustable frequency drive. 5 Figure 5.16: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the plug and tighten them. Figure 5.17: Mount cable clamp to ensure 360 degree connection between chassis and shield; ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the clamp. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-11

35 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Connection for A5 5 Figure 5.18: First, terminate the motor ground, then insert the motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp Motor Connection for B1 and B2 Figure 5.19: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

36 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Motor Connection for B3 and B4 Figure 5.20: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. Figure 5.21: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp Motor Connection for C1 and C2 Figure 5.22: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-13

37 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Connection for C3 and C4 5 Figure 5.23: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. Figure 5.24: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

38 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation DC Bus Connection The DC bus terminal is used for DC back-up, with the intermediate circuit being supplied from an external source. Terminal numbers used: 88, 89 5 Figure 5.25: DC bus connections for enclosure B3. Figure 5.26: DC bus connections for enclosure B4. Figure 5.27: DC bus connections for enclosure C3. Figure 5.28: DC bus connections for enclosure C4. Please contact Danfoss if you require further information. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-15

39 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Brake Connection Option The connection cable to the brake resistor must be shielded/armored. Brake resistor Terminal number Terminals R- R+ NOTE! Dynamic brake calls for extra equipment and safety considerations. For further information, please contact Danfoss Use cable clamps to connect the shield to the metal cabinet of the adjustable frequency drive and to the decoupling plate of the brake resistor. 2. Dimension the cross-section of the brake cable to match the brake current. NOTE! Voltages up to 975 V DC 600 V AC) may occur between the terminals. Figure 5.29: Brake connection terminal for B3. Figure 5.30: Brake connection terminal for B4. Figure 5.31: Brake connection terminal for C3. Figure 5.32: Brake connection terminal for C MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

40 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation NOTE! If a short circuit in the brake IGBT occurs, prevent power dissipation in the brake resistor by using a line switch or contactor to disconnect the line power from the adjustable frequency drive. Only the adjustable frequency drive should control the contactor. NOTE! Place the brake resistor in an environment free of fire risk and ensure that no external objects can fall into the brake resistor through ventilation slots. Do not cover ventilation slots and grids Relay Connection To set relay output, see par. group 5-4* Relays. No make (normally open) break (normally closed) make (normally open) break (normally closed) 5 Terminals for relay connection (A2 and A3 enclosures). Terminals for relay connection (A5, B1 and B2 enclosures). MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-17

41 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.33: Terminals for relay connection (C1 and C2 enclosures). The relay connections are shown in the cut-out with relay plugs (from the accessory bag) fitted. Figure 5.34: Terminals for relay connections for B3. Only one relay input is fitted from the factory. When the second relay is needed, remove the knock-out MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

42 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Figure 5.35: Terminals for relay connections for B4. 5 Figure 5.36: Terminals for relay connections for C3 and C4. Located in the upper right corner of the adjustable frequency drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-19

43 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Relay Output Relay 1 Relay 2 Terminal 01: common Terminal 02: normal open 240 V AC Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC Terminal 04: common Terminal 05: normal open 400 V AC Terminal 06: normal closed 240 V AC Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in par Function Relay, par On Delay, Relay, and par Off Delay, Relay. Additional relay outputs by using option module MCB Wiring Example and Testing The following section describes how to terminate and access control wires. For an explanation of the function, programming and wiring of the control terminals, please see chapter How to program the adjustable frequency drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

44 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Access to Control Terminals All terminals to the control cables are located underneath the terminal cover on the front of the adjustable frequency drive. Remove the terminal cover with a screwdriver. 130BT248 5 Figure 5.37: Access to control terminals for A2, A3, B3, B4, C3 and C4 enclosures Remove front cover to access control terminals. When replacing the front cover, ensure proper fastening by applying a torque of 2 Nm. Figure 5.38: Access to control terminals for A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2 enclosures MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-21

45 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Control Terminals Drawing reference numbers: pole plug digital I/O pole plug RS-485 bus pole analog I/O. 4. USB connection. 5 Figure 5.39: Control terminals (all enclosures) Control Cable Clamp 1. Use a clamp from the accessory bag to connect the shield to the adjustable frequency drive decoupling plate for control cables. See the section entitled Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables for the correct termination of control cables. Figure 5.40: Control cable clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

46 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Electrical Installation and Control Cables 5 Figure 5.41: Diagram showing all electrical terminals. (Terminal 37 present for units with safe stop function only.) Terminal number Terminal description Parameter number Factory default Terminal Relay No operation Terminal Relay No operation 12 Terminal 12 Supply V DC 13 Terminal 13 Supply V DC 18 Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-10 Start 19 Terminal 19 Digital Input 5-11 No operation 20 Terminal 20 - Common 27 Terminal 27 Digital Input/Output 5-12/5-30 Coast inverse 29 Terminal 29 Digital Input/Output 5-13/5-31 Jog 32 Terminal 32 Digital Input 5-14 No operation 33 Terminal 33 Digital Input 5-15 No operation 37 Terminal 37 Digital Input - Safe Stop 42 Terminal 42 Analog Output 6-50 Speed 0-HighLim 53 Terminal 53 Analog Input 3-15/6-1*/20-0* Reference 54 Terminal 54 Analog Input 3-15/6-2*/20-0* Feedback Table 5.5: Terminal connections MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-23

47 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Very long control cables and analog signals may, in rare cases and depending on the installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground loops due to noise from line power supply cables. If this occurs, break the shield or insert a 100 nf capacitor between shield and chassis. NOTE! The common of digital / analog inputs and outputs should be connected to separate common terminals 20, 39, and 55. This will prevent ground current interference among groups. For example, it prevents switching on digital inputs from disturbing analog inputs. 5 NOTE! Control cables must be shielded/armored MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

48 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation Note that unintended motor start can occur; make sure no personnel or equipment is in danger! Please follow these steps to test the motor connection and direction of rotation. Start with no power to the unit. Figure 5.42: Step 1: First, remove the insulation on both ends of a in [50 70 mm] piece of wire. 5 Figure 5.43: Step 2: Insert one end in terminal 27 using a suitable terminal screwdriver. (Note: For units with the Safe Stop function, the existing jumper between terminal 12 and 37 should not be removed for the unit to be able to run!) Figure 5.44: Step 3: Insert the other end in terminal 12 or 13. (Note: For units with the Safe Stop function, the existing jumper between terminal 12 and 37 should not be removed for the unit to be able to run!) Figure 5.45: Step 4: Power up the unit and press the [Off] button. In this state, the motor should not rotate. Press [Off] to stop the motor at any time. Note that the LED on the [OFF] button should be lit. If alarms or warnings are flashing, please see chapter 7 for more information. Figure 5.46: Step 5: By pressing the [Hand on] button, the LED above the button should be lit and the motor may rotate. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-25

49 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.47: Step 6: The speed of the motor can be seen in the LCP. It can be adjusted by pushing the up and down arrow buttons. Figure 5.48: Step 7: To move the cursor, use the left and right arrow buttons. This enables speed changes by larger increments. Figure 5.49: Step 8: Press the [Off] button to stop the motor again. Figure 5.50: Step 9: Change two motor wires if the desired direction of rotation is not achieved. Remove line power from the adjustable frequency drive before changing motor wires MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

50 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Switches S201, S202, and S801 Switches S201 (Al 53) and S202 (Al 54) are used to select a current (0-20 ma) or a voltage (0 to 10 V) configuration of the analog input terminals 53 and 54 respectively. Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69). Please note that the switches may be covered by an option, if so equipped. Default setting: S201 (AI 53) = OFF (voltage input) S202 (AI 54) = OFF (voltage input) S801 (Bus termination) = OFF 5 Figure 5.51: Switches location. 5.2 Final Optimization and Test Final Optimization and Test To optimize motor shaft performance and optimize the adjustable frequency drive for the connected motor and installation, please follow these steps: Ensure that the adjustable frequency drive and the motor are connected, and power is applied to the adjustable frequency drive. NOTE! Before power-up, ensure that connected equipment is ready for use. Step 1. Locate motor nameplate NOTE! The motor is either star- (Y) or delta-connected ( ). This information is located on the motor nameplate data. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-27

51 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.52: Motor nameplate example Step 2. Enter the motor nameplate data in the following parameter list. To access the list, first press [QUICK MENU] key, then select Q2 Quick Set-up. 1. Motor Power [kw] or Motor Power [HP] par par Motor Voltage par Motor Frequency par Motor Current par Motor Nominal Speed par Table 5.6: Motor related parameters Step 3. Activate Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Performing an AMA ensures best possible performance. An AMA automatically takes measurements from the specific motor connected and compensates for installation variances. 1. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or use [MAIN MENU] and set Terminal 27 par to No operation (par [0]) 2. Press [QUICK MENU], select "Q2 Quick Set-up", scroll down to AMA par Press [OK] to activate the AMA par Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If the sine wave filter is mounted, run only reduced AMA, or remove the sine wave filter during the AMA procedure. 5. Press the [OK] key. The display should show Press [Hand on] to start. 6. Press the [Hand on] key. A progress bar indicates if the AMA is in progress. Stop the AMA during operation 1. Press the [OFF] key. The adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode and the display shows that the AMA was terminated by the user. Successful AMA 1. The display shows Press [OK] to finish AMA. 2. Press the [OK] key to exit the AMA state. Unsuccessful AMA 1. The adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode. A description of the alarm can be found in the Troubleshooting section. 2. "Report Value in the [Alarm Log] shows the last measuring sequence carried out by the AMA before the adjustable frequency drive entered alarm mode. This number, along with the description of the alarm, will assist in troubleshooting. If contacting Danfoss Service, make sure to mention the number and alarm description MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

52 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation NOTE! An unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly entered motor nameplate data or too big of a difference between the motor and the adjustable frequency drive power sizes. Step 4. Set speed limit and ramp time Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time. Minimum Reference par Maximum Reference par Motor Speed Low Limit par or 4-12 Motor Speed High Limit par or 4-14 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s] par Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 1 [s] par MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-29

53 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

54 VLT AQUA Drive 6 Commissioning and Application Examples 6 Commissioning and Application Examples 6.1 Quick Set-up Quick Menu Mode The GLCP provides access to all parameters listed under the Quick Menus. To set parameters using the [Quick Menu] button: Pressing [Quick Menu] the list indicates the different areas contained in the quick menu. Efficient parameter set-up for water applications The parameters can easily be set up for the vast majority of the water and wastewater applications only by using the [Quick Menu]. The best way to set parameters using the [Quick Menu] is by following the steps below: 1. Press [Quick Set-up] for selecting basic motor settings, ramp times, etc. 2. Press [Function Set-ups] for setting up the required functionality of the adjustable frequency drive - if not already covered by the settings in [Quick Set-up]. 3. Choose between General Settings, Open-loop Settings and Closed-loop Settings. 6 It is recommended to do the set-up in the order listed. Figure 6.1: Quick Menu view. Par. Designation [Units] 0-01 Language 1-20 Motor Power [kw] 1-22 Motor Voltage [V] 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz] 1-24 Motor Current [A] 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM] 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s] 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [s] 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Table 6.1: Quick Set-up parameters. Please see section Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations If No Operation is selected in terminal 27, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27 is necessary to enable start. If Coast Inverse (factory default value) is selected in Terminal 27, a connection to +24V is necessary to enable start. NOTE! For detailed parameter descriptions, please see the following section on Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 6-1

55 6 Commissioning and Application Examples VLT AQUA Drive Start/Stop Terminal 18 = start/stop par [8] Start Terminal 27 = No operation par [0] No operation (Default coast inverse Par Digital Input, Terminal 18 = Start (default) Par Digital Input, Terminal 27 = coast inverse (default) 6 Figure 6.2: Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop Function! Closed-loop Wiring Terminal 12 /13: +24 V DC Terminal 18: Start par [8] Start (Default) Terminal 27: Coast par [2] coast inverse (Default) Terminal 54: Analog input L1-L3: Line power terminals U,V and W: Motor terminals 6-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

56 VLT AQUA Drive 6 Commissioning and Application Examples Submersible Pump Application The system consists of a submersible pump controlled by a Danfoss VLT AQUA Drive and a pressure transmitter. The transmitter gives a 4-20 ma feedback signal to the VLT AQUA Drive, which keeps a constant pressure by controlling the speed of the pump. To design a drive for a submersible pump application, there are a few important issues to take into consideration. Therefore, the drive used must be chosen according to motor current. 1. The motor is a what is known as a Can motor with a stainless steel can between the rotor and stator. There is a larger and a more magnetic resistant air-gap than on a normal motor hence a weaker field which results in the motor being designed with a higher rated current than a norm motor with similar rated power. 2. The pump contains thrust bearings which are damaged when run below minimum speed, which is normally 30 Hz. 3. The motor reactance is nonlinear in submersible pump motors and therefore Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA) may not be possible. However, normally submersible pumps are operated with very long motor cables that might eliminate the nonlinear motor reactance and enable the drive to perform AMA. If AMA fails, the motor data can be set from parameter group 1-3* (see motor datasheet). Be aware that if an AMA has been successful, the drive will compensate for voltage drop in the long motor cables, so if the advanced motor data are set manually, the length of the motor cable must be taken into considerations to optimize system performance. 4. It is important that the system be operated with a minimum of wear and tear of the pump and motor. A Danfoss Sine-Wave filter can lower the motor insulation stress and increase lifetime (check actual motor insulation and the adjustable frequency drive du/dt specification). It is recommended to use a filter to reduce the need for service EMC performance can be difficult to achieve due to the fact that the special pump cable, which is able to withstand the wet conditions in the well, is normally unshielded. A solution could be to use a shielded cable above the well and fix the screen to the well pipe if it is made of steel (can also be made of plastic). A Sine-Wave filter will also reduce the EMI from unshielded motor cables. The special can motor is used due to the wet installation conditions. The drive needs to be designed for the system according to output current to be able to run the motor at nominal power. To prevent damage to the thrust bearings of the pump, it is important to ramp the pump from stop to min. speed as quickly as possible. Well-known manufacturers of submersible pumps recommend that the pump be ramped to a min. speed (30 Hz) in max. 2 3 seconds. The new VLT AQUA Drive is designed with initial and final ramp for these applications. The initial and final ramps are 2 individual ramps, where Initial Ramp, if enabled, will ramp the motor from stop to min. speed and automatically switch to normal ramp, when min. speed is reached. Final ramp will do the opposite from min. speed to stop in a stop situation. Pipe-fill mode can be enabled to prevent water hammering. The Danfoss adjustable frequency drive is capable of filling vertical pipes using the PID controller to slowly ramp up the pressure with a user specified rate (units/sec). If enabled, the drive will enter pipe fill mode, when it reaches min. speed after startup. The pressure will slowly be ramped up until it reaches a user-specified filled setpoint, after which the drive automatically disables pipe fill mode and continues in normal closed-loop operation. This feature is designed for irrigation applications. Electrical Wiring Typical parameter settings (typical/recommended settings in brackets.) Parameters: Motor Rated Power Par / par Motor Rated Voltage Par Motor Current Par Motor Rated Speed Par Enable Reduced Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA in par. 1-29) NOTE! Note the analog input 2, (terminal (54) format must be set to ma. (switch 202). MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 6-3

57 6 Commissioning and Application Examples VLT AQUA Drive Min. Reference Par (30 Hz) Max. Reference Par (50/60 Hz) Initial Ramp-up Time Par (2 sec.) Final Ramp-down Time Par (2 sec.) Normal Ramp-up Time Par (8 sec. depending on size) Normal Ramp-down Time Par (8 sec. depending on size) Motor Min. Speed Par (30 Hz) Motor Max. Speed Par (50/60 Hz) Use the Closed-loop wizard under Quick Menu_Funtion_Setup to easily set up the feedback settings in the PID controller. Pipe Fill Mode Pipe Fill Enable Par Pipe Fill Rate Par (Feedback units/sec.) Filled Setpoint Par (Feedback units) MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

58 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7.1 Ways of Operation Ways of Operation The Adjustable Frequency Drive can be Operated in 3 Ways: 1. Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP), see Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP), see RS-485 serial communication or USB, both for PC connection, see If the adjustable frequency drive is equipped with the serial communication option, please refer to the relevant documentation How to Operate the Graphical LCP (GLCP) The following instructions are valid for the GLCP (LCP 102). The GLCP is divided into four functional groups: 1. Graphical display with Status lines. 2. Menu keys and indicator lights (LEDs) - selecting mode, changing parameters and switching between display functions Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). 4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). Graphical display: The LCD display is back lit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. All data is displayed on the LCP, which can show up to five operating variables while in [Status] mode. Display lines: a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and graphics. b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data and variables defined or chosen by the user. By pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra line can be added. c. Status line: Status messages displaying text. The display is divided into 3 sections: Top section (a) shows the status when in status mode, or up to two variables when not in status mode and in the case of an alarm/warning. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-1

59 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The number of the Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up in par. 0-10) is shown. When programming in another set-up than the Active Set-up, the number of the set-up being programmed appears to the right in brackets. Middle section (b) shows up to 5 variables with related unit, regardless of status. In the case of an alarm/warning, the warning is shown instead of the variables. It is possible to toggle between three status readout displays by pressing the [Status] key. Operating variables with different formatting are shown in each status screen - see below. Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the displayed operating variables. The values/measurements to be displayed can be defined via par. 0-20, 0-21, 0-22, 0-23, and 0-24, which can be accessed via [QUICK MENU], "Q3 Function Set-ups", "Q3-1 General Settings", "Q3-11 Display Settings". Each value / measurement readout parameter selected in par to par has its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal point. Larger numeric values are displayed with few digits after the decimal point. Ex.: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A. Status display I 7 This read-out state is standard after start-up or initialization. Use [INFO] to obtain information about the value/measurement linked to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3). See the operating variables shown in the display in this illustration. 1.1, BP and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 and 3 are shown in medium size Status display II See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in the display in this illustration. In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor power and Frequency are selected as variables in the first and second lines. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in large size. 130BP Status display III: This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic Control. For further information, see the section Smart Logic Control. 130BP MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

60 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive Bottom section always shows the state of the adjustable frequency drive in status mode. Top section Middle section 130BP Bottom section Display Contrast Adjustment Press [status] and [ ] for darker display Press [status] and [ ] for brighter display Indicator lights (LEDs): If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on the control panel. The On LED is activated when the adjustable frequency drive receives power from AC line voltage, a DC bus terminal, or an external 24 V supply. At the same time, the back light is on. Green LED/On: Control section is working. Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning. Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. 7 GLCP keys Menu keys The menu keys are divided into functions. The keys below the display and indicator lamps are used for parameter set-up, including choice of display indication during normal operation. 130BP [Status] Indicates the status of the adjustable frequency drive and/or the motor. Three different readouts can be chosen by pressing the [Status] key: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control. Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing back to display mode from either the quick menu mode, main menu mode or alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to toggle single or double readout mode. [Quick Menu] Allows quick set-up of the adjustable frequency drive. The most common functions can be programmed here. The [Quick Menu] consists of: - Q1: My Personal Menu - Q2: Quick Set-up - Q3: Function Set-ups - Q5: Changes Made - Q6: Loggings The function set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of water and wastewater applications including variable torque, constant torque, pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer pumps, aeration blowers and other pump and fan applications. Among other features, it also includes parameters for selecting which variables to display on the LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closedloop single zone and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to water and wastewater applications. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-3

61 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The quick menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par. 0-60, 0-61, 0-65 or It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and main menu mode. [Main Menu] is used for programming all parameters. The main menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par. 0-60, 0-61, 0-65 or For the majority of water and wastewater applications it is not necessary to access the main menu parameters, but instead the quick menu, quick set-up and function set-ups provide the simplest and quickest access to the typical required parameters. It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and quick menu mode. Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter. [Alarm Log] displays an alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1-A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the arrow keys to navigate to the alarm number and press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of the adjustable frequency drive before it enters alarm mode. 7 [Back] reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure. [Cancel] the last change or command will be canceled as long as the display has not been changed. [Info] displays information about a command, parameter, or function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed information when needed. Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel]. Navigation Keys The four navigation arrows are used to navigate between the different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu] and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor. [OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter. Operation Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control panel. 130BP MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

62 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive [Hand On] enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the GLCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor, and makes it possible to give the motor speed reference using the arrow keys. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Hand on] Key on LCP. The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated: [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on] Reset Coasting stop inverse (motor coasting to stop) Reversing Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb Stop command from serial communication Quick stop DC brake NOTE! External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a start command via the LCP. [Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Off] key on LCP. If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive, the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting the line power supply. 7 [Auto On] enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Auto on] key on LCP. NOTE! An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] [Auto on]. [Reset] is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par Reset Keys on LCP. The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter How to Operate the Numeric LCP (NLCP) The following instructions are valid for the NLCP (LCP 101). The control panel is divided into four functional groups: 1. Numeric display. NOTE! Parameter copy is not possible with Numeric Local Control Panel (LCP101). 2. Menu key and LEDs - changing parameters and switching between display functions. 3. Navigation keys and LEDs. 4. Operation keys and LEDs. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-5

63 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Select one of the following modes: Status Mode: Displays the status of the adjustable frequency drive or the motor. If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to status mode. A number of alarms can be displayed. Quick Set-up or Main Menu Mode: Display parameters and parameter settings. Figure 7.1: Numerical LCP (NLCP) 7 130BP BP Figure 7.2: Status display example Figure 7.3: Alarm display example LEDs: Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on. Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning. Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. Menu key Select one of the following modes: Status Quick Set-up Main Menu Main Menu is used for programming all parameters. The parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par Main Menu Password, par Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par Personal Menu Password or par Access to Personal Menu w/o Password. Quick Set-up is used to set up the adjustable frequency drive using only the most essential parameters. The parameter values can be changed using the up/down arrows when the value is flashing. Select the main menu by pressing the [Menu] key a number of times until the main menu LED is lit. Select the parameter group [xx- ] and press [OK] Select the parameter [ -xx] and press [OK] If the parameter is an array parameter, select the array number and press [OK] Select the wanted data value and press [OK] Navigation keys [Back] for stepping backwards 7-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

64 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive Arrow [ ] [ ] keys are used for navigating between parameter groups, parameters and within parameters. [OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter. 130BP Figure 7.4: Display example Operation keys Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control panel. 130BP Figure 7.5: Operation keys of the numerical LCP (NLCP) [Hand on] enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the LCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor and it is now possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Hand on] Key on LCP. 7 External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a 'start' command via the LCP. The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated: [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on] Reset Coasting stop inverse Reversing Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb Stop command from serial communication Quick stop DC brake [Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Off] Key on LCP. If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive, the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the line power supply. [Auto on] enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Auto on] Key on LCP. NOTE! An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] [Auto on]. [Reset] is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Reset] Key on LCP. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-7

65 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Changing Data 1. Press the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key. 2. Use [ ] and [ ] keys to find parameter group to edit. 3. Press the [OK] key. 4. Use [ ] and [ ] keys to find parameter to edit. 5. Press the [OK] key. 6. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to select the correct parameter setting. Or, to move to digits within a number, use the keys. The cursor indicates the digit selected to be changed. The [ ] key increases the value, the [ ] key decreases the value. 7. Press the [Cancel] key to disregard the change, or press the [OK] key to accept the change and enter the new setting Changing a Text Value 7 If the selected parameter is a text value, it can be changed by using the up/down navigation keys. The up key increases the value, and the down key decreases the value. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK]. Figure 7.6: Display example Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data value, change the chosen data value by means of the [ ] and [ ] navigation keys as well as the up/down [ ] [ ] navigation keys. Use the ] and [ ] navigation keys to move the cursor horizontally. Figure 7.7: Display example. Use the up/down navigation keys to change the data value. The up key increases the data value, while the down key reduces it. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK]. Figure 7.8: Display example. 7-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

66 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive Changing of Data Value, Step-by-Step Certain parameters can be changed step-by-step or by an infinite number of variables. This applies to par Motor Power [kw], par Motor Voltage and par Motor Frequency. The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric data values, and as numeric data values using an infinite number of variables Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack. Par Alarm Log: Error Code to par Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log which can be read out. Choose a parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the value log. Use par Preset Reference as another example: Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the indexed values. To change the parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the value by using the up/down keys. Press [OK] to accept the new setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the parameter Tips and Tricks 7 * For the majority of water and wastewater applications, the Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-ups provide the simplest and quickest access to all of the typical parameters required. * Whenever possible, performing an AMA will ensure best shaft performance. * Display contrast can be adjusted by pressing [Status] and [ ] for a darker display, or by pressing [Status] and [ ] for a brighter display. * Under [Quick Menu] and [Changes Made], all the parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are displayed. * Press and hold the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds to access any parameter. * For service purposes, it is recommended to copy all parameters to the LCP, see par 0-50 for further information. Table 7.1: Tips and tricks Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings when Using GLCP Once the set-up of an adjustable frequency drive is complete, it is recommended to store (backup) the parameter settings in the GLCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up Software Tool. NOTE! Stop the motor before performing any of these operations. Data storage in LCP: 1. Go to par LCP Copy 2. Press the [OK] key. 3. Select All to LCP 4. Press the [OK] key. All parameter settings are now stored in the GLCP indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-9

67 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The GLCP can now be connected to another adjustable frequency drive and the parameter settings copied to this adjustable frequency drive. Data transfer from LCP to adjustable frequency drive: 1. Go to par LCP Copy 2. Press the [OK] key. 3. Select All from LCP 4. Press the [OK] key. The parameter settings stored in the GLCP are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK] Initialization to Default Settings There are two ways to initialize the adjustable frequency drive to default: Recommended initialization and manual initialization. Please be aware that they have different impacts according to the below description. 7 Recommended initialization (via par Operation Mode) 1. Select par Operation Mode 2. Press [OK] 3. Select Initialization (for NLCP select 2 ) 4. Press [OK] 5. Disconnect the power from the unit and wait for the display to turn off. 6. Reconnecting the power resets the adjustable frequency drive. Note that first start-up takes a few more seconds 7. Press [Reset] par Operation Mode initializes all except: par RFI 1 par Protocol par Address par Baud Rate par Minimum Response Delay par Max Response Delay par Max Inter-Char Delay par Operating Hours to par Over Volts par Historic Log: Even to par Historic Log: Time par Alarm Log: Error Code to par Alarm Log: Time NOTE! Parameters selected in par My Personal Menu will remain present with the default factory setting. Manual initialization NOTE! When carrying out manual initialization, serial communication, RFI filter settings and fault log settings are reset. Removes parameters selected in par My Personal Menu 1. Disconnect from the line power and wait until the display turns off. 2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same time while powering up the Graphical LCP (GLCP) 2b. Press [Menu] while the LCP 101, Numerical Display is powering up. This parameter initializes all except: par Operating Hours par Power-ups par Over Temps par Over Volts 3. Release the keys after 5 s 4. The adjustable frequency drive is now programmed according to default settings 7-10 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

68 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive RS-485 Bus Connection One or more adjustable frequency drives can be connected to a controller (or master) using the standard RS-485 interface. Terminal 68 is connected to the P signal (TX+, RX+), while terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX-, RX-). If more than one adjustable frequency drive is connected to a master, use parallel connections. Figure 7.9: Connection example. In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the shield, ground the cable screen via terminal 61, which is connected to the frame via an RC link. Bus termination The RS-485 bus must be terminated by a resistor network at both ends. If the drive is the first or the last device in the RS-485 loop, set the switch S801 on the control card to ON. For more information, see the paragraph Switches S201, S202, and S How to Connect a PC to the Adjustable Frequency Drive To control or program the adjustable frequency drive from a PC, install the PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10. The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB cable, or via the RS-485 interface as shown in the Design Guide, chapter How to Install > Installation of misc. connections. NOTE! The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals. The USB connection is connected to protection ground on the adjustable frequency drive. Use only isolated laptop for PC connection to the USB connector on the adjustable frequency drive. Figure 7.10: For control cable connections, see section on Control Terminals. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-11

69 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive PC Software Tools PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10 All adjustable frequency drives are equipped with a serial communication port. Danfoss provides a PC tool for communication between PC and adjustable frequency drive, PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10. Please check the section on Available Literature for detailed information on this tool. MCT 10 set-up software MCT 10 has been designed as an easy to use interactive tool for setting parameters in our adjustable frequency drives. The software can be downloaded from the Danfoss internet site The MCT 10 set-up software will be useful for: Planning a communication network off-line. MCT 10 contains a complete adjustable frequency drive database Commissioning adjustable frequency drives on-line. Saving settings for all adjustable frequency drives. Replacing an adjustable frequency drive in a network. Simple and accurate documentation of adjustable frequency drive settings after commissioning. Expanding an existing network. Adjustable frequency drives developed in the future will be fully supported. 7 MCT 10 set-up software supports Profibus DP-V1 via a master class 2 connection. This makes it possible to access on-line read/write parameters in an adjustable frequency drive via the Profibus network. This will eliminate the need for an extra communication network. Save adjustable frequency drive settings: 1. Connect a PC to the unit via the USB COM port. (Note: Use a PC that is isolated from the line power, in conjunction with the USB port. Failure to do so may damage equipment.) 2. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software 3. Choose Read from drive 4. Choose Save as All parameters are now stored on the PC. Load adjustable frequency drive settings: 1. Connect a PC to the adjustable frequency drive via the USB com port 2. Open MCT 10 Set-up software 3. Choose Open stored files will be shown. 4. Open the appropriate file 5. Choose Write to drive All parameter settings are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive. A separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available: MG.10.Rx.yy MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

70 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive The MCT 10 Set-up software modules The following modules are included in the software package: MCT Set-up 10 Software Setting parameters Copy to and from adjustable frequency drives Documentation and print-out of parameter settings incl. diagrams Ext. user interface Preventive Maintenance Schedule Clock settings Timed Action Programming Smart Logic Controller Set-up Ordering number: Please order the CD containing MCT 10 Set-up software using code number 130B1000. MCT 10 can also be downloaded from the Danfoss Internet: Business Area: Motion Controls. 7 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-13

71 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

72 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 8.1 How to Program Parameter Set-up Overview of parameter groups Group Title Function 0- Operation/Display Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the adjustable frequency drive, function of the LCP buttons and configuration of the LCP display. 1- Load/Motor Parameter group for motor settings. 2- Brakes Parameter group for setting brake features in the adjustable frequency drive. 3- Reference / Ramps Parameters for reference handling, defining limitations, and configuring the reaction of the adjustable frequency drive to changes. 4- Limits / Warnings Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings. 5- Digital In/Out Parameter group for configuring the digital inputs and outputs. 6- Analog In/Out Parameter group for configuring the analog inputs and outputs. 8- Communication and Options Parameter group for configuring communications and options. 9- Profibus Parameter group for Profibus-specific parameters. 10- DeviceNet Serial Communication Bus Parameter group for DeviceNet-specific parameters. 13- Smart Logic Parameter group for Smart Logic Control 14- Special Functions Parameter group for configuring special adjustable frequency drive functions. 15- Drive Information Parameter group containing adjustable frequency drive information such as operating data, hardware configuration and software versions. 16- Data Readouts Parameter group for data readouts, such as current references, voltages, control, alarm, warning and status words. 18- Info and Readouts This parameter group contains the last 10 Preventive Maintenance logs. 20- Drive Closed-loop This parameter group is used for configuring the closed-loop PID controller that controls the output frequency of the unit. 21- Extended Closed-loop Parameters for configuring the three extended closed-loop PID controllers. 22- Application Functions These parameters monitor water applications. 23- Time-based Functions These parameters are for actions to be performed on a daily or weekly basis, such as different references for working hours/non-working hours. 25- Basic Cascade Controller Functions Parameters for configuring the basic cascade controller for sequence control of multiple pumps. 26- Analog I/0 Option MCB 109 Parameters for configuring the Analog I/0 Option MCB Extended Cascade Control Parameters for configuring the extended cascade control. 29- Water Application Functions Parameters for setting water specific functions. 31- Bypass Option Parameters for configuring the bypass option 8 Table 8.1: Parameter Groups Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the Graphic LCP or Numeric LCP in the display area (See Section 5 for details.) Access the parameters by pressing the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key on the control panel. The quick menu is used primarily for commissioning the unit at startup by providing those parameters necessary to start operation. The main menu provides access to all the parameters for detailed application programming. All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default functions suitable for the majority of water applications but if other special functions are required, they must be programmed in parameter group 5 or 6. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-1

73 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Q1 My Personal Menu Parameters defined by the user can be stored in Q1 My Personal Menu. Select My Personal Menu to display only the parameters, which have been pre-selected and programmed as personal parameters. For example, a pump or equipment OEM may have pre-programmed these to be in My Personal Menu during factory commissioning to make on-site commissioning / fine tuning simpler. These parameters are selected in par My Personal Menu. Up to 20 different parameters can be defined in this menu Setpoint PID Proportional Gain Q1 My Personal Menu PID Integral Time Q2 Quick Set-up The parameters in Q2 Quick Set-up are the basic parameters which are always needed to set up the adjustable frequency drive for operation. 8 Q2 Quick Set-up Parameter number and name Unit 0-01 Language 1-20 Motor Power kw 1-22 Motor Voltage V 1-23 Motor Frequency Hz 1-24 Motor Current A 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed RPM 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time s 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time s 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit RPM 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit RPM 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 8-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

74 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Q3 Function Set-ups The function set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of water and wastewater applications including variable torque, constant torque, pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer pumps, aeration blowers and other pump and fan applications. Among other features, it also includes parameters for selecting which variables to display on the LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closedloop single zone and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to water and wastewater applications. How to access the Function Set-up - example: 130BT BA Figure 8.1: Step 1: Turn on the adjustable frequency drive (On LED lights) Figure 8.5: Step 5: Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll down to, e.g., Analog Outputs. Press [OK]. 130BT BA Figure 8.2: Step 2: Press the [Quick Menus] button (quick menu choices appear). Figure 8.6: Step 6: Choose parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output. Press [OK]. 130BT BA Figure 8.3: Step 3: Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll down to Function Set-ups. Press [OK]. Figure 8.7: Step 7: Use the up/down navigation keys to select between the different choices. Press [OK]. 130BA Figure 8.4: Step 4: Function Set-up choices appear. Choose 03-1 General Settings. Press [OK]. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-3

75 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The Function Set-up parameters are grouped in the following way: Q3-1 General Settings Q3-10 Clock Settings Q3-11 Display Settings Q3-12 Analog Output Q3-13 Relays 0-70 Set Date and Time 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 6-50 Terminal 42 Output Relay Function Relay 0-71 Date Format 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale Relay Function Relay 0-72 Time Format 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale Option relay Function Relay 0-74 DST/Summertime 0-23 Display Line 2 Large Option relay Function Relay 0-76 DST/Summertime Start 0-24 Display Line 3 Large Option relay Function Relay 0-77 DST/Summertime End 0-37 Display Text Display Text Display Text 3 Q3-2 Open-loop Settings Q3-20 Digital Reference Q3-21 Analog Reference 3-02 Minimum Reference 3-02 Minimum Reference 3-03 Maximum Reference 3-03 Maximum Reference 3-10 Preset Reference 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref/Feedb. Value 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref/Feedb. Value 8 Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings Q3-30 Feedback Settings Q3-31 PID Settings 1-00 Configuration Mode PID Normal/Inverse Control Reference/Feedb.Unit PID Start Speed [RPM] 3-02 Minimum Reference Setpoint Maximum Reference PID Proportional Gain 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage PID Integral Time 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref/Feedb Value 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref/Feedb Value 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Q5 Changes Made Q5 Changes Made can be used for fault finding. Select Changes made to get information about: The last 10 changes. Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll between the last 10 changed parameters. The changes made since default setting. Select Loggings to get information about the display line readouts. The information is shown in graphs. Only display parameters selected in par and par can be viewed. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for later reference. Please notice that the parameters listed in the below tables for Q5 only serve as examples since they will vary depending on the programming of the particular adjustable frequency drive PID Integral Time PID Proportional Gain Q5-1 Last 10 Changes PID Proportional Gain PID Integral Time Q5-2 Since Factory Setting 8-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

76 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Analog Input 53 Analog Input 54 Q5-3 Input Assignments Q6 Loggings Q6 Loggings can be used for fault finding. Please notice that the parameters listed in the table for Q6 below only serve as examples since they will vary depending on the programming of the particular adjustable frequency drive. Reference Analog Input 53 Motor Current Frequency Feedback Energy Log Trending Cont Bin Trending Timed Bin Trending Comparison Q6 Loggings Main Menu Mode Both the GLCP and NLCP provide access to the main menu mode. Select main menu mode by pressing the [Main Menu] key. Figure 6.2 shows the resulting read-out, which appears on the display of the GLCP. Lines 2 through 5 on the display show a list of parameter groups which can be chosen by toggling the up and down buttons. 8 Figure 8.8: Display example. Each parameter has a name and number which remain the same regardless of the programming mode. In main menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates the parameter group number. All parameters can be changed in the main menu. The configuration of the unit (par Configuration Mode) will determine other parameters available for programming. For example, selecting Closed-loop enables additional parameters related to closed-loop operation. Option cards added to the unit enable additional parameters associated with the option device. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-5

77 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Parameter Selection In main menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. Select a parameter group using the navigation keys. The following parameter groups are accessible: Group no. Parameter group: 0 Operation/Display 1 Load/Motor 2 Brakes 3 References/Ramps 4 Limits/Warnings 5 Digital In/Out 6 Analog In/Out 8 Comm. and Options 9 Profibus 10 CAN Ser. Com. Bus 11 LonWorks 13 Smart Logic 14 Special Functions 15 Drive Information 16 Data Readouts 18 Data Readouts 2 20 Drive Closed-loop 21 Ext. Closed-loop 22 Application Functions 23 Time-based Functions 24 Fire Mode 25 Cascade Controller 26 Analog I/O Option MCB 109 Table 8.2: Parameter groups. 8 After selecting a parameter group, choose a parameter by means of the navigation keys. The middle section on the GLCP display shows the parameter number and name, as well as the selected parameter value. Figure 8.9: Display example. 8.2 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations Main Menu The main menu includes all available parameters in the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 adjustable frequency drive. All parameters are grouped logically with a group name indicating the function of the parameter group. All parameters are listed by name and number in the section Parameter Options in this. All parameters included in the quick menus (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q5 and Q6) can be found in the following. Some of the most commonly used parameters for VLT AQUA Drive applications are also explained in the following section. For a detailed explanation of all parameters, please refer to the VLT AQUA Drive Programming Guide MG.20.OX.YY which is available at or by ordering it from the local Danfoss office. 8-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

78 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive ** Operation / Display Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the adjustable frequency drive, function of the LCP buttons and configuration of the LCP display Language Option: Defines the language to be used in the display. The adjustable frequency drive can be delivered with 4 different language packages. English and German are included in all packages. English cannot be erased or manipulated. 1 Small Option: Select a variable for display in line 1, left position. [0] None No display value selected [37] Display Text 1 Present control word [38] Display Text 2 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. [39] Display Text 3 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-7

79 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [89] Date and Time Readout Displays the current date and time. [953] Profibus Warning Word Displays Profibus communication warnings. [1005] Readout Transmit Error Counter View the number of CAN control transmission errors since the last power-up. [1006] Readout Receive Error Counter View the number of CAN control receipt errors since the last power-up. [1007] Readout Bus-off Counter View the number of Bus Off events since the last power-up. [1013] Warning Parameter View a DeviceNet-specific warning word. One separate bit is assigned to every warning. [1115] LON Warning Word Shows the LON-specific warnings. [1117] XIF Revision Shows the version of the external interface file of the Neuron C chip on the LON option. [1118] LON Works Revision Shows the software version of the application program of the Neuron C chip on the LON option. [1500] Operating Hours View the number of running hours of the adjustable frequency drive. [1501] Running Hours View the number of running hours of the motor. [1502] kwh Counter View the line power consumption in kwh. [1600] Control Word View the control word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the serial communication port in hex code. [1601] * Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and slow-down) in selected unit. [1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and slow-down) in percent. [1603] Status Word Present status word 8 [1605] Main Actual Value [%] One or more warnings in a Hex code [1609] Custom Readout View the user-defined readouts as defined in par. 0-30, 0-31 and [1610] Power [kw] Actual power consumed by the motor in kw. [1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the motor in HP. [1612] Motor Voltage Voltage supplied to the motor. [1613] Motor Frequency Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive in Hz. [1614] Motor Current Phase current of the motor measured as effective value. [1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency from the adjustable frequency drive in percent. [1616] Torque [Nm] Present motor load as a percentage of the rated motor torque. [1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per minute), i.e., the motor shaft speed in closed-loop based on the entered motor nameplate data, the output frequency and the load on the adjustable frequency drive. [1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, calculated by the ETR function. See also parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature. [1622] Torque [%] Shows the actual torque produced, in percentage. [1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the adjustable frequency drive. [1632] BrakeEnergy/s Present braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor. Stated as an instantaneous value. [1633] BrakeEnergy/2 min Braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor. The mean power is calculated continuously for the most recent 120 seconds. [1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heatsink temperature of the adjustable frequency drive. The cut-out limit is 203 ± 9 F [95 ± 5 C]; cutting back in occurs at 158 ± 9 F [70 ± 5 C]. [1635] Thermal Drive Load Percentage load of the inverters [1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the adjustable frequency drive [1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the adjustable frequency drive [1638] SL Control State State of the event executed by the control [1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card. [1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a percentage, i.e., the sum of analog/pulse/bus. 8-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

80 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [1652] Feedback [Unit] Signal value in units from the programmed digital input(s). [1653] DigiPot Reference View the contribution of the digital potentiometer to the actual reference Feedback. [1654] Feedback 1 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 1. See also par. 20-0*. [1655] Feedback 2 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 2. See also par. 20-0*. [1656] Feedback 3 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 3. See also par. 20-0*. [1658] PID Output [%] Returns the drive closed-loop PID controller output value in percent. [1659] Adjusted Setpoint Displays the actual operating setpoint after it is modified by flow compensation. See parameters 22-8*. [1660] Digital Input Displays the status of the digital inputs. Signal low = 0; Signal high = 1. Regarding order, see par Bit 0 is at the extreme right. [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting Setting of input terminal 53. Current = 0; Voltage = 1. [1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a reference or protection value. [1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting Setting of input terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1. [1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as reference or protection value. [1665] Analog Output 42 [ma] Actual value at output 42 in ma. Use par to select the variable to be represented by output 42. [1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs. [1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 29 as a pulse input. [1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 33 as a pulse input. [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output mode. [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 29 in digital output mode. [1671] Relay Output [bin] View the setting of all relays. 8 [1672] Counter A View the present value of Counter A. [1673] Counter B View the present value of Counter B. [1675] Analog input X30/11 Actual value of the signal on input X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card. Option) [1676] Analog input X30/12 Actual value of the signal on input X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card. Optional) [1677] Analog output X30/8 [ma] Actual value at output X30/8 (General Purpose I/O Card. Optional) Use Par to select the variable to be shown. [1680] Serial com. bus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master. [1682] Serial com. bus REF 1 Main reference value sent with control word via the serial communications network, e.g., from the BMS, PLC or other master controller. [1684] Comm. Option STW Extended serial communication option status word. [1685] ADF Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master. [1686] AFD Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the bus master. [1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1691] Alarm Word 2 One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1693] Warning Word 2 One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1694] Ext. Status Word One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1695] Ext. Status Word 2 One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1696] Maintenance Word The bits reflect the status for the preventive maintenance events programmed in parameter group 23-1* [1830] Analog Input X42/1 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/O card. [1831] Analog Input X42/3 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/3 on the Analog I/O card. [1832] Analog Input X42/5 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/5 on the Analog I/O card. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-9

81 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/7 on the Analog I/O card. [1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/9 on the Analog I/O card. [1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/11 on the Analog I/O card. [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2137] Ext. 2 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 2 [2138] Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 2 [2139] Ext. 2 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 2 [2157] Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 3 [2158] Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 3 [2159] Ext. Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 3 [2230] No-Flow Power The calculated No-Flow Power for the actual operating speed [2580] Cascade Status Status for the operation of the cascade controller [2581] Pump Status Status for the operation of each individual pump controlled by the cascade controller [2791] Cascade Reference Reference output for use with follower drives. [2792] % Of Total Capacity Readout parameter to show the system operating point as a % capacity of total system capacity. [2793] Cascade Option Status Readout parameter to show the status of the cascade system Display Line 1.2 Small Option: Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position. [1662] * Analog input 53 The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small Display Line 1.3 Small Option: Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. [1614] * Motor Current The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small Display Line 2 Large Option: Select a variable for display in line 2. [1615] * Frequency The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small 0-24 Display Line 3 Large Option: [1652] * Feedback [Unit] The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable for display in line MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

82 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 0-37 Display Text 1 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual text string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. If it is to be displayed permanently, select Display Text 1 in par Display Line 1.1 Small, par Display Line 1.2 Small, par Display Line 1.3 Small, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. Use the and buttons to move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, it can be changed. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Display Text 2 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual text string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. If to be displayed permanently select Display Text 2 in par Display Line 1.1 Small, par Display Line 1.2 Small, par Display Line 1.3 Small, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. Use the and buttons to move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Display Text 3 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual text string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. If it is to be displayed permanently, select Display Text 3 in par Display Line 1.1 Small,par Display Line 1.2 Small, par Display Line 1.3 Small, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the 8 LCP to change a character. Use the and buttons to move the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Set Date and Time Range: [ :00] Sets the date and time of the internal clock. The format to be used is set in par and :00 NOTE! :59 * This parameter does not display the actual time. This can be read in par The clock will not begin counting until a setting different from default has been made Date Format Option: [0] * YYYY-MM-DD Sets the date format to be used in the LCP. [1] DD-MM-YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP. [2] MM/DD/YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-11

83 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 0-72 Time Format Option: Sets the time format to be used in the LCP. [0] * 24 h [1] 12 h 0-74 DST/Summertime Option: Choose how Daylight Saving Time/Summertime should be handled. For manual DST/Summertime enter the start date and end date in par DST/Summertime Start and par DST/Summertime End. [0] * OFF [2] Manual 0-76 DST/Summertime Start Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the date and time when summertime/dst starts. The date is programmed in the format selected in par Date Format DST/Summertime End Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the date and time when summertime/dst ends. The date is programmed in the format selected in par Date Format General Settings, 1-0* Define whether the adjustable frequency drive operates in open-loop or closed-loop Configuration Mode Option: [0] * Open-loop Motor speed is determined by applying a speed reference or by setting desired speed when in Hand Mode. Open-loop is also used if the adjustable frequency drive is part of a closed-loop control system based on an external PID controller providing a speed reference signal as output. [3] Closed-loop Motor speed will be determined by a reference from the built-in PID controller varying the motor speed as part of a closed-loop control process (e.g., constant pressure or flow). The PID controller must be configured in par. 20-** or via the function set-ups accessed by pressing the [Quick Menu] button. NOTE! This parameter cannot be changed when the motor is running. NOTE! When set for closed-loop, the commands reversing and start reversing will not reverse the direction of the motor MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

84 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 1-20 Motor Power [kw] Range: 4.00 kw* [ kw] 1-22 Motor Voltage Range: 400. V* [ V] Enter the nominal motor voltage according to the motor nameplate data. The default value corresponds to the nominal rated output of the unit. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running Motor Frequency Range: 50. Hz* [ Hz] Select the motor frequency value from the motor nameplate data.for 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and par Maximum Reference to the 87 Hz application. NOTE! This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running Motor Current Range: 7.20 A* [ A] Enter the nominal motor current value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for calculating motor torque, motor thermal protection, etc. 8 NOTE! This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running Motor Nominal Speed Range: RPM* [ RPM] Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for calculating automatic motor compensations. NOTE! This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Option: The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automatically optimizing the advanced motor parameters par Stator Resistance (Rs) to par Main Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary. [0] * Off No function MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-13

85 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [1] Enable complete AMA performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main reactance Xh. [2] Enable reduced AMA performs a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs in the system only. Select this option if an LC filter is used between the adjustable frequency drive and the motor. Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the section Automatic Motor Adaptation. After a normal sequence, the display will read: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing the [OK] key, the adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation. Note: For the best adaptation of the adjustable frequency drive, run AMA on a cold motor AMA cannot be performed while the motor is running. NOTE! It is important to set motor par. 1-2* Motor Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to 10 min., depending on the motor power rating. NOTE! Avoid generating external torque during AMA 8 NOTE! If one of the settings in par. 1-2* Motor Data is changed, par Stator Resistance (Rs) to par Motor Poles, the advanced motor parameters, will return to the default setting. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. NOTE! Full AMA should be run without filter only while reduced AMA should be run with filter. See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation in the Design Guide * Reference Limits Parameters for setting the reference unit, limits and ranges Minimum Reference Range: Ref- [ par Referen- erencefeed-cefeedbackunit] backunit* Enter the Minimum Reference. The Minimum Reference is the lowest value obtainable by adding all references together. The Minimum Reference value and unit matches the configuration choice made in par Configuration Mode and par Reference/Feedback Unit, respectively. NOTE! This parameter is used in open-loop only MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

86 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 3-03 Maximum Reference Range: Ref- [par Referen- erencefeed-cefeedbackunit] backunit* Enter the maximum acceptable value for the remote reference. The Maximum Reference value and unit matches the configuration choice made in par Configuration Mode and par Reference/Feedback Unit, respectively. NOTE! If operating with par. 1-00, Configuration Mode set for Closed-loop [3], par , Maximum Reference/Feedb. must be used Preset Reference Array [8] Range: 0.00 %* [ %] Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time Range: s* [ s] 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time Range: s* [ s] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-15

87 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 3-84 Initial Ramp Time Range: 0 s* [0 60 s] Enter the initial ramp-up time from zero speed to Motor Speed Low Limit, par or Submersible deep well pumps can be damaged by running below minimum speed. A fast ramp time below minimum pump speed is recommended. This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate from zero speed to Motor Speed Low Limit Check Valve Ramp Time Range: 0 s* [0 60 s] In order to protect ball check valves in a stop situation, the check valve ramp can be utilized as a slow ramp rate from par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], to Check Valve Ramp End Speed, set by the user in par or par When par is different from 0 seconds, the Check Valve Ramp Time is effectuated and will be used to ramp down the speed from Motor Speed Low Limit to the Check Valve End Speed in par or par Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] Range: 0 [RPM]* [0 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]] Set the speed in [RPM] below Motor Speed Low Limit where the Check Valve is expected to be closed and the Check Valve no longer shall be active MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

88 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [Hz] Range: 0 [Hz]* [0 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]] Set the speed in [Hz] below Motor Speed Low Limit where the Check Valve Ramp will no longer be active Final Ramp Time Range: 0 [s]* [0 60 [s]] Enter the Final Ramp Time to be used when ramping down from Motor Speed Low Limit, par or 4-12, to zero speed. Submersible deep well pumps can be damaged by running below minimum speed. A fast ramp time below minimum pump speed is recommended. This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate from Motor Speed Low Limit to zero speed ** Limits and Warnings Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to correspond to the manufacturer s recommended minimum motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit must not exceed the setting in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] Range: RPM* [par RPM] Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can be set to correspond to the manufacturer s maximum rated motor. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the setting in par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]. Only par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] will be displayed, depending on other parameters in the main menu, and depending on default settings dependant on global location. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-17

89 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive NOTE! Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par Switching Frequency). NOTE! Any changes in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par Warning Speed High to the same value as set in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ** Digital In/Out Parameter group for configuring the digital input and output Terminal 27 Mode Option: [0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. [1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. 8 Please note that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running * Digital Inputs Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals. The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the adjustable frequency drive. All digital inputs can be set to the following functions: Digital input function Select Terminal No operation [0] All *term 32, 33 Reset [1] All Coast inverse [2] All Coast and reset inverse [3] All DC brake inverse [5] All Stop inverse [6] All External interlock [7] All Start [8] All *term 18 Latched start [9] All Reversing [10] All *term 19 Start reversing [11] All Jog [14] All *term 29 Preset reference on [15] All Preset ref bit 0 [16] All Preset ref bit 1 [17] All Preset ref bit 2 [18] All Freeze reference [19] All Freeze output [20] All Speed up [21] All Slow [22] All Set-up select bit 0 [23] All Set-up select bit 1 [24] All Pulse input [32] term 29, 33 Ramp bit 0 [34] All Line failure inverse [36] All Run Permissive [52] Hand start [53] Auto-start [54] DigiPot Increase [55] All DigiPot Decrease [56] All DigiPot Clear [57] All Counter A (up) [60] 29, MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

90 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33 Reset Counter A [62] All Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33 Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33 Reset Counter B [65] All Sleep Mode [66] Reset Maintenance Word [78] Lead Pump Start [120] Lead Pump Alternation [121] Pump 1 Interlock [130] Pump 2 Interlock [131] Pump 3 Interlock [132] All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB 101. Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter. All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: [0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to terminal. [1] Reset Resets adjustable frequency drive after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset. [2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0 => coasting stop. (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). [3] Coast and reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free mode and resets the adjustable frequency drive. Logic 0 => coasting stop and reset. [5] DC brake inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See par to par The function is only active when the value in par is different from 0. Logic 0 => DC braking. 8 [6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected terminal goes from logical level 1 to 0. The stop is performed according to the selected ramp time (par and par. 3-52). NOTE! When the adjustable frequency drive is at the torque limit and has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the adjustable frequency drive stops, configure a digital output to Torque limit & stop [27] and connect this digital output to a digital input that is configured as coast. [7] External Interlock Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but External Interlock generates the alarm message external fault on the display when the terminal which is programmed for Coast Inverse is logic 0. The alarm message will also be active via digital outputs and relay outputs, if programmed for External Interlock. The alarm can be reset using a digital input or the [RESET] key if the cause for the External Interlock has been removed. A delay can be programmed in par , External Interlock Time. After applying a signal to the input, the reaction described above will be delayed with the time set in par [8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0 = stop. (Default Digital input 18) [9] Latched start Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. Motor stops when Stop inverse is activated [10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to reverse. The reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation. It does not activate the start function. Select both directions in par Motor Speed Direction. (Default Digital input 19). [11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at the same time. [14] Jog Used for activating jog speed. See par MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-19

91 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive (Default Digital input 29) [15] Preset reference on Used for shifting between external reference and preset reference. It is assumed that External/ preset [1] has been selected in par Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = one of the eight preset references is active. [16] Preset ref bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to the table below. [17] Preset ref bit 1 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to the table below. [18] Preset ref bit 2 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to the table below. Preset ref. bit Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref [19] Freeze ref Freezes actual reference. The frozen reference is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par and 3-52) in the range 0 - par Maximum Reference. 8 [20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par and 3-52) in the range 0 - par Motor Frequency. NOTE! When Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive cannot be stopped via a low start [13] signal. Stop the adjustable frequency drive via a terminal programmed for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and reset, inverse [3]. [21] Speed up For digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiometer). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze output. When Speed up is activated for less than 400 msec., the resulting reference will be increased by 0.1%. If Speed up is activated for more than 400 msec., the resulting reference will ramp according to Ramp 1 in par [22] Slow Same as Speed up [21]. [23] Set-up select bit 0 Selects one of the four set-ups. Set par Active Set-up to Multi Set-up. [24] Set-up select bit 1 Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23]. (Default Digital input 32) [32] Pulse input Select Pulse input when using a pulse sequence as either reference or feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*. [34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 will select ramp 1 while logic 1 will select ramp 2. [36] Line failure inverse Activates par Line Failure. Line failure inverse is active in the Logic 0 situation. [52] Run Permissive The input terminal, for which the Run permissive has been programmed must be logic 1 before a start command can be accepted. Run permissive has a logic AND function related to the terminal which is programmed for START [8], Jog [14] or Freeze Output [20], which means that in order to start running the motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Run Permissive is programmed on multiple terminals, Run permissive needs only be logic 1 on one of the terminals for the function to be carried out. The digital output signal for Run Request (Start [8], Jog [14] or Freeze output [20]) programmed in par. 5-3* Digital outputs, or par. 5-4* Relays, will not be affected by Run Permissive. [53] Hand start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into hand mode as if button Hand On on the LCP has been pressed and a normal stop command will be overridden. If disconnecting the signal, the motor will stop. To make any other start commands valid, another digital input must be assigned to Auto-Start and a signal applied to this. The Hand On and Auto On buttons on the LCP has no 8-20 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

92 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive impact. The Off button on the LCP will override Hand Start and Auto-Start. Press either the Hand On or Auto On button to make Hand Start and Auto-Start active again. If no signal on neither Hand Start nor Auto-Start, the motor will stop regardless of any normal Start command applied. If signal applied to both Hand Start and Auto-Start, the function will be Auto-Start. If pressing the Off button on the LCP, the motor will stop regardless of signals on Hand Start and Auto-Start. [54] Auto-start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into auto mode as if the LCP button Auto On has been pressed. See also Hand Start [53] [55] DigiPot Increase Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9* [56] DigiPot Decrease Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9* [57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer reference described in parameter group 3-9* [60] Counter A (up) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter. [61] Counter A (down) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter. [62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A. [63] Counter B (up) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter. [64] Counter B (down) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter. [65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B. [66] Sleep Mode Forces adjustable frequency drive into sleep mode (see par. 22-4*, Sleep Mode). Reacts on the rising edge of signal applied! [78] Reset Preventive Maintenance Word Resets all data in par , Preventive Maintenance Word, to 0. The below setting options are all related to the cascade controller. Wiring diagrams and settings for parameter, see group 25-** for more details. 8 [120] Lead Pump Start Starts/stops the lead pump (controlled by the adjustable frequency drive). A start requires that also a System Start signal has been applied, e.g., to one of the digital inputs set for Start [8]! [121] Lead Pump Alternation Forces alternation of the lead pump in a cascade controller. Lead Pump Alternation, par , must be set to either At Command [2] or At Staging or At Command [3]. Alternation Event, par , can be set to any of the four options. [ ] Pump1 Interlock - Pump9 Interlock The function will depend on the setting in par , Number of Pumps. If set to No [0], then Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by relay RELAY1 etc. If set to Yes [1], Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by the adjustable frequency drive only (without any of the built-in relays involved) and Pump2 to the pump controlled by the relay RELAY1. Variable speed pump (lead) cannot be interlocked in the basic cascade controller. See below table: Setting in Par. 5-1* Setting in Par [0] No [1] Yes [130] Pump1 Interlock Controlled by RELAY1 (only if not lead pump) Adjustable frequency drive controlled (cannot be interlocked) [131] Pump2 Interlock Controlled by RELAY2 Controlled by RELAY1 [132] Pump3 Interlock Controlled by RELAY3 Controlled by RELAY2 [133] Pump4 Interlock Controlled by RELAY4 Controlled by RELAY3 [134] Pump5 Interlock Controlled by RELAY5 Controlled by RELAY4 [135] Pump6 Interlock Controlled by RELAY6 Controlled by RELAY5 [136] Pump7 Interlock Controlled by RELAY7 Controlled by RELAY6 [137] Pump8 Interlock Controlled by RELAY8 Controlled by RELAY7 [138] Pump9 Interlock Controlled by RELAY9 Controlled by RELAY8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-21

93 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Option: [0] * No Operation Same options and functions as par. 5-1* Digital Inputs Terminal 32 Digital Input Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input. Option: [0] * No operation 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input Same options and functions as par. 5-1* Digital Inputs. Option: [0] * No operation 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output Option: Same options and functions as par. 5-3*. [0] * No operation 5-40 Function Relay 8 Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8]) Select options to define the function of the relays. The selection of each mechanical relay is realized in an array parameter. [0] * No Operation [1] Control Ready [2] Drive Ready [3] Drive Ready/Remote [4] Stand-by/No Warning [5] Running [6] Running/No Warning [8] Run on Ref./No Warning [9] Alarm [10] Alarm or Warning [11] At Torque Limit [12] Out of Current Range [13] Below Current, low [14] Above Current, high [15] Out of Speed Range [16] Below Speed, low [17] Above Speed, high [18] Out of Feedb. Range [19] Below Feedback, low [20] Above Feedback, high [21] Thermal Warning 8-22 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

94 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [25] Reverse [26] Bus OK [27] Torque Limit & Stop [28] Brake, No Warning [29] Brake Ready, No Fault [30] Brake Fault (IGBT) [35] External Interlock [36] Control Word Bit 11 [37] Control Word Bit 12 [40] Out of Ref. Range [41] Below Reference, low [42] Above Ref. high [45] Bus ctrl [46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout [47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout [60] Comparator 0 [61] Comparator 1 [62] Comparator 2 [63] Comparator 3 [64] Comparator 4 [65] Comparator 5 8 [70] Logic Rule 0 [71] Logic Rule 1 [72] Logic Rule 2 [73] Logic Rule 3 [74] Logic Rule 4 [75] Logic Rule 5 [80] SL Digital Output A [81] SL Digital Output B [82] SL Digital Output C [83] SL Digital Output D [84] SL Digital Output E [85] SL Digital Output F [160] No Alarm [161] Running Reverse [165] Local Ref. Active [166] Remote Ref. Active [167] Start Cmd. Active [168] Drive in Hand Mode [169] Drive in Auto Mode [180] Clock Fault [181] Prev. Maintenance [190] No-Flow MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-23

95 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [191] Dry Pump [192] End of Curve [193] Sleep Mode [194] Broken Belt [195] Bypass Valve Control [199] Pipe Filling [211] Cascade Pump1 [212] Cascade Pump2 [213] Cascade Pump3 [223] Alarm, Trip Locked [224] Bypass Mode Active 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ A* [ N/A] Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the motor shaft speed and the high feedback value, see also par Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ** Analog In/Out 8 Parameter group for configuring the analog input and output Live Zero Timeout Time Range: 10 s* [1-99 s] Enter the Live Zero Timeout time period. Live Zero Timeout Time is active for analog inputs, i.e., terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or feedback sources. If the reference signal value associated with the selected current input falls below 50% of the value set in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par Terminal 53 Low Current, par Terminal 54 Low Voltage or par Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period longer than the time set in par Live Zero Timeout Time, the function selected in par Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

96 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Option: Select the timeout function. The function set in par Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54 is below 50% of the value in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par Terminal 53 Low Current, par Terminal 54 Low Voltage or par Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period defined in par Live Zero Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur simultaneously, the adjustable frequency drive prioritizes the timeout functions as follows: 1. par Live Zero Timeout Function 2. par Control Timeout Function The output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive can be: [1] frozen at the present value [2] overruled to stop [3] overruled to jog speed [4] overruled to max. speed [5] overruled to stop with subsequent trip [0] * Off [1] Freeze output [2] Stop [3] Jogging [4] Max. speed [5] Stop and trip Terminal 53 Low Voltage Range: 0.07 V* [ par V] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the low reference/ feedback value set in par Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Terminal 53 High Voltage Range: V* [par V] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the high reference/feedback value set in par Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-25

97 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/low current set in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage and par Terminal 53 Low Current Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/high current value set in A* par Terminal 53 High Voltage and par Terminal 53 High Current Terminal 54 Low Voltage Range: 0.07 V* [ par V] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the low reference/ feedback value, set in par Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Terminal 54 High Voltage Range: V* [par V] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the high reference/feedback value set in par Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/low current value set in par Terminal 54 Low Voltage and par Terminal 54 Low Current Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/high current value set in par Terminal 54 High Voltage and par Terminal 54 High Current Terminal 42 Output Option: Select the function of Terminal 42 as an analog current output. A motor current of 20 ma corresponds to Imax. [0] * No operation [100] Output frequency : Hz, (0 20 ma) [101] Reference : Minimum reference - Maximum reference, (0 20 ma) [102] Feedback : -200% to +200% of par , (0 20 ma) [103] Motor current : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par ), (0 20 ma) [104] Torque rel to limit : 0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16), (0 20 ma) [105] Torq relate to rated : 0 - Motor rated torque, (0 20 ma) [106] Power : 0 - Motor rated power, (0 20 ma) [107] * Speed : 0 - Speed High Limit (par and par. 4-14), (0 20 ma) [113] Ext. Closed-loop 1 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) 8-26 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

98 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [114] Ext. Closed-loop 2 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [115] Ext. Closed-loop 3 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [130] Output freq. 4-20mA : Hz [131] Reference 4-20mA : Minimum Reference - Maximum Reference [132] Feedback 4-20mA : -200% to +200% of par Maximum Reference/Feedb. [133] Motor cur. 4-20mA : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par Inv. Max. Current) [134] Torq.% lim 4-20 ma : 0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16) [135] Torq.% nom 4-20 ma : 0 - Motor rated torque [136] Power 4-20mA : 0 - Motor rated power [137] Speed 4-20mA : 0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 and 4-14) [139] Bus ctrl. : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [140] Bus ctrl ma : 0-100% [141] Bus ctrl t.o. : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [142] Bus ctrl 4-20mA t.o. : 0-100% [143] Ext. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% [144] Ext. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% [145] Ext. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% 8 NOTE! Values for setting the minimum reference are found in open-loop par Minimum Reference and for closed-loop par Minimum Reference/ Feedb. - values for maximum reference for open-loop are found in par Maximum Reference and for closed-loop par Maximum Reference/ Feedb Terminal 42 Output Min Scale Range: 0.00 %* [ %] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-27

99 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale Range: %* [ %] EXAMPLE 1: Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = Hz Range needed for output = 0 50 Hz Output signal 0 or 4 ma is needed at 0 Hz (0% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0% Output signal 20 ma is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50% 8 EXAMPLE 2: Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200% Range needed for output= 0 100% Output signal 0 or 4 ma is needed at 0% (50% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 50% Output signal 20 ma is needed at 100% (75% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75% 8-28 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

100 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive EXAMPLE 3: Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%), 0 10 ma Output signal 0 or 4 ma is needed at Min ref - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0% Output signal 10 ma is needed at Max ref (100% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200% (20 ma / 10 ma x 100%=200%) Drive Closed-loop, 20-** 8 This parameter group is used for configuring the closed-loop PID controller, which controls the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive Reference/Feedback Unit Option: [0] None [1] * % [5] PPM [10] 1/min [11] RPM [12] Pulse/s [20] l/s [21] l/min [22] l/h [23] m 3 /s [24] m 3 /min [25] m 3 /h [30] kg/s [31] kg/min [32] kg/h [33] t/min [34] t/h [40] m/s [41] m/min [45] m MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-29

101 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [60] C [70] mbar [71] bar [72] Pa [73] kpa [74] m WG [75] mm Hg [80] kw [120] GPM [121] gal/s [122] gal/min [123] gal/h [124] CFM [125] ft 3 /s [126] ft 3 /min [127] ft 3 /h [130] lb/s [131] lb/min 8 [132] lb/h [140] ft/s [141] ft/min [145] ft [160] F [170] psi [171] lb/in 2 [172] in WG [173] ft WG [174] in Hg [180] HP This parameter determines the unit that is used for the setpoint reference and feedback that the PID controller will use for controlling the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive Setpoint 1 Range: Proc- [ Proc- essctrlu- nit* essctrlunit] Setpoint 1 is used in closed-loop mode to enter a setpoint reference that is used by the adjustable frequency drive s PID controller. See the description of par Feedback Function. NOTE! Setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

102 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive PID Normal/Inverse Control Option: [0] * Normal [1] Inverse Normal [0] causes the adjustable frequency drive s output frequency to decrease when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference. This is common for pressure-controlled supply fan and pump applications. Inverse [1] causes the adjustable frequency drive s output frequency to increase when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference PID Start Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] When the adjustable frequency drive is first started, it initially ramps up to this output speed in open-loop mode, following the active ramp-up time. When the output speed programmed here is reached, the adjustable frequency drive will automatically switch to closed-loop mode and the PID controller will begin to function. This is useful in applications in which the driven load must first quickly accelerate to a minimum speed when it is started. NOTE! This parameter will only be visible if par Motor Speed Unit is set to [0], RPM PID Proportional Gain Range: 0.50 N/A* [ N/A] 8 If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in par Maximum Reference/Feedb., the PID controller will try to change the output speed equal to what is set in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] but in practice of course limited by this setting. The proportional band (error causing output to change from 0 100%) can be calculated by means of the formula: ( 1 Proportional Gain ) (Max Reference) NOTE! Always set the desired for par Maximum Reference/Feedb. before setting the values for the PID controller in par. group 20-9* PID Integral Time Range: s* [ s] Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from the PID controller as long as there is a deviation between the reference/setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size of the deviation. This ensures that the deviation (error) approaches zero. Quick response on any deviation is obtained when the integral time is set to a low value. Setting it too low, however, may cause the control to become unstable. The value set is the time needed for the integrator to add the same contribution as the proportional part for a certain deviation. If the value is set to 10,000, the controller will act as a pure proportional controller with a P-band based on the value set in par PID Proportional Gain. When no deviation is present, the output from the proportional controller will be 0. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-31

103 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive ** Miscellaneous This group contains parameters used for monitoring water/wastewater applications Low Power Auto Set-up Option: When set for Enabled, an auto set-up sequence is activated, automatically setting speed to approx. 50% and 85% of rated motor speed (par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM], par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]). At those two speeds, the power consumption is automatically measured and stored. Before enabling Auto Set-up: 1. Close valve(s) in order to create a no-flow condition 2. The adjustable frequency drive must be set for open-loop (par Configuration Mode). Note that it is important also to set par Torque Characteristics. [0] * OFF [1] Enabled NOTE! Auto set-up must be done when the system has reached normal operating temperature! 8 NOTE! It is important that the par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to the max. operational speed of the motor! It is important to do the auto set-up before configuring the integrated PI controller as settings will be reset when changing from closed to open-loop in par Configuration Mode. NOTE! Carry out the tuning with the same settings in par Torque Characteristics, as for operation after the tuning Low Power Detection Option: [0] * Disabled [1] Enabled If selecting Enabled, the low power detection commissioning must be carried out in order to set the parameters in group 22-3* for proper operation! Low Speed Detection Option: [0] * Disabled [1] Enabled Select Enabled for detecting when the motor operates with a speed as set in par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

104 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive No-Flow Function Option: Common actions for Low Power Detection and Low Speed Detection (Individual selections not possible). [0] * OFF [1] Sleep Mode [2] Warning Messages in the Local Control Panel display (if mounted) and/or signal via a relay or a digital output. [3] Alarm The adjustable frequency drive trips and the motor stays stopped until reset No-Flow Delay Range: 10 s* [1-600 s] Set the time. Low Power/Low Speed must remain detected to activate signal for actions. If detection disappears before the timer runs out, the timer will be reset Dry Pump Function Option: Low Power Detection must be Enabled (par Low Power Detection) and commissioned (using either parameter group 22-3*, No Flow Power Tuning, or par Low Power Auto Set-up) in order to use Dry Pump Detection. [0] * OFF [1] Warning Messages in the Local Control Panel display (if mounted) and/or signal via a relay or a digital output. [2] Alarm The adjustable frequency drive trips and the motor stays stopped until reset Dry Pump Delay Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Defines for how long the Dry Pump condition must be active before activating Warning or Alarm No-Flow Power Range: 0.00 kw* [ kw] Readout of calculated no-flow power at actual speed. If power drops to the display value, the adjustable frequency drive will consider the condition as a no-flow situation Power Correction Factor Range: 100 %* [1-400 %] Make corrections to the calculated power at par No-Flow Power. If No Flow is detected when it should not be detected, the setting should be decreased. However, if No Flow is not detected when it should be detected, the setting should be increased to above 100% Low Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Set used speed to the 50% level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-33

105 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Low Speed [Hz] Range: 0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not visible if RPM selected). Set used speed to the 50% level. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Low Speed Power [kw] Range: 0 kw* [ kw] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for International (parameter not visible if North America selected). Set power consumption to 50% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Low Speed Power [HP] Range: 0 hp* [ hp] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for North America (parameter not visible if International selected). Set power consumption to 50% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Set used speed for the 85% level. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed [Hz] Range: 0.0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not visible if RPM selected). Set used speed for the 85% level. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed Power [kw] Range: 0 kw* [ kw] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for International (parameter not visible if North America selected). Set power consumption to 85% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed Power [HP] Range: 0 hp* [ hp] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for North America (parameter not visible if International selected). Set power consumption to 85% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Minimum Run Time Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for the motor after a start command (digital input or bus) before entering sleep mode MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

106 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Minimum Sleep Time Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in sleep mode. This will override any wake-up conditions Wake-up Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [par par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external controller. Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be canceled Wake-up Speed [Hz] Range: 0 Hz* [par par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not visible if RPM selected). Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external controller controlling the pressure. Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be cancelled Wake-up Ref./FB Difference Range: 10%* [0-100%] Only to be used if par. 1-00, Configuration Mode, is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure. Set the pressure drop allowed as a percentage of the setpoint for the pressure (Pset) before canceling sleep mode. 8 NOTE! If used in application where the integrated PI controller is set for inverse control in par , PID, Normal/Inverse Control, the value set in par will automatically be added Setpoint Boost Range: 0 %* [ %] Only to be used if par Configuration Mode, is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used. For example, in systems with constant pressure control, it is advantageous to increase the system pressure before the motor is stopped. This will extend the time during which the motor is stopped and help to avoid frequent start/stop. Set the desired overpressure/temperature as a percentage of the setpoint for the pressure (Pset)/ temperature before entering sleep mode. If set at 5%, the boost pressure will be Pset*1.05. The negative values can be used, for example, for cooling tower control, where a negative change is needed Maximum Boost Time Range: 60 s* [0-600 s] Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure. Set the maximum time for which boost mode will be allowed. If the set time is exceeded, sleep mode will be entered and will not wait for the set boost pressure to be reached. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-35

107 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive End of Curve Function Option: [0] * OFF End of Curve monitoring not active. [1] Warning A warning is issued in the display [W94]. [2] Alarm An alarm is issued and the adjustable frequency drive trips. A message [A94] appears in the display. NOTE! Automatic restart will reset the alarm and start the system again End of Curve Delay Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] When an end of curve condition is detected, a timer is activated. When the time set in this parameter expires and the End of Curve condition has been steady in the entire period, the function set in par End of Curve Function will be activated. If the condition disappears before the timer expires, the timer will be reset Flow Compensation Option: [0] * Disabled [0] Disabled: Setpoint compensation not active. [1] Enabled [1] Enabled: Setpoint compensation is active. Enabling this parameter allows the Flow Compensated Setpoint operation Square-linear Curve Approximation Range: 100 %* [0-100 %] Example 1: Adjustment of this parameter allows the shape of the control curve to be adjusted. 0 = Linear 100% = Ideal shape (theoretical). NOTE! Please note: Not visible when running in cascade MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

108 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Work Point Calculation Option: Example 1: Speed at System Design Working Point is known: From the data sheet showing characteristics for the specific equipment at different speeds, simply reading across from the HDESIGN point and the QDESIGN point allows us to find point A, which is the system design working point. The pump characteristics at this point should be identified and the associated speed programmed. Closing the valves and adjusting the speed until HMIN has been achieved allows the speed at the no flow point to be identified. Adjustment of par Square-linear Curve Approximation then allows the shape of the control curve to be adjusted infinitely. Example 2: Speed at System Design Working Point is not known: Where the Speed at System Design Working Point is unknown, another reference point on the control curve needs to be determined by means of the data sheet. By looking at the curve for the rated speed and plotting the design pressure (HDESIGN, Point C), the flow at that pressure QRATED can be determined. Similarly, by plotting the design flow (QDESIGN, Point D), the pressure HD at that flow can be determined. Knowing these two points on the pump curve, along with HMIN described above, allows the adjustable frequency drive to calculate the reference point B and thus to plot the control curve that will also include the system design working point A. 8 [0] * Disabled Disabled [0]: Work Point Calculation not active. To be used if speed at design point is known (see table above). [1] Enabled Enabled [1]: Work Point Calculation is active. Enabling this parameter allows the calculation of the unknown System Design Working Point at 50/60 Hz speed, from the input data set in MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-37

109 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive par Speed at No-Flow [RPM] par Speed at No-Flow [Hz], par Pressure at No- Flow Speed, par Pressure at Rated Speed, par Flow at Design Point and par Flow at Rated Speed Speed at No-Flow [RPM] Range: 300. RPM* [0 - par RPM] Resolution 1 RPM. The speed of the motor at which the flow is zero and the minimum pressure HMIN is achieved should be entered here in RPM. Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be entered in par Speed at No- Flow [Hz]. If it has been decided to use RPM in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at Design Point [RPM] should also be used. Closing the valves and reducing the speed until minimum pressure HMIN is achieved will determine this value Speed at No-Flow [Hz] Range: 50.0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] Resolution Hz. The speed of the motor at which flow has effectively stopped and minimum pressure HMIN is achieved should be entered here in Hz. Alternatively, the speed in RPM can be entered in par Speed at No-Flow [RPM]. If it has been decided to use Hz in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at Design Point [Hz] should also be used. Closing the valves and reducing the speed until minimum pressure HMIN is achieved will determine this value Speed at Design Point [RPM] Range: RPM* [par RPM] Resolution 1 RPM. Only visible when par Work Point Calculation is set to Disable. The speed of the motor at which the system design working point is achieved should be entered here in RPM. Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be entered in par Speed at Design Point [Hz]. If it has been decided to use RPM in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at No-Flow [RPM] should also be used Speed at Design Point [Hz] Range: 50/60.0 Hz* [par par Hz] Resolution Hz. Only visible when par Work Point Calculation is set to Disable. The speed of the motor at which the system design working point is achieved should be entered here in Hz. Alternatively, the speed in RPM can be entered in par Speed at Design Point [RPM]. If it has been decided to use Hz in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at No-Flow [RPM] should also be used Pressure at No-Flow Speed Range: N/A* [ par N/A] Enter the pressure HMIN corresponding to Speed at No Flow in Reference/Feedback Units Pressure at Rated Speed Range: [par N/A] N/A* Enter the value corresponding to the Pressure at Rated Speed, in Reference/Feedback Units. This value can be defined using the pump datasheet MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

110 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Flow at Rated Speed Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the value corresponding to Flow at Rated Speed. This value can be defined using the pump datasheet * Timed Actions Use Timed Actions for actions needing to be performed on a daily or weekly basis, e.g., different references for working hours / non-working hours. Up to 10 Timed Actions can be programmed in the adjustable frequency drive. The Timed Action number is selected from the list when entering parameter group 23-0* from the LCP. par ON Time par Occurrence then refer to the selected Timed Action number. Each timed action is divided into an ON time and an OFF time, in which two different actions may be performed. The actions programmed in timed actions are merged with corresponding actions from digital inputs, control work via bus and Smart Logic Controller, according to merge rules set up in 8-5*, digital/bus. NOTE! The clock (parameter group 0-7*) must be correctly programmed for timed actions to function correctly. NOTE! When mounting an Analog I/O MCB109 option card, a battery backup of the date and time is included. 8 NOTE! The PC-based configuration tool MCT 10 includes a special guide for easy programming of timed actions ON Time Array [10] Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the ON time for the timed action. NOTE! The adjustable frequency drive has no backup of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default ( :00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with backup is installed. In par Clock Fault, it is possible to program a warning for cases when the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down ON Action Arra [10] Option: Select the action during ON Time. See par SL Controller Action for descriptions of the options. [0] * DISABLED [1] No action MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-39

111 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [2] Select set-up 1 [3] Select set-up 2 [4] Select set-up 3 [5] Select set-up 4 [10] Select preset ref 0 [11] Select preset ref 1 [12] Select preset ref 2 [13] Select preset ref 3 [14] Select preset ref 4 [15] Select preset ref 5 [16] Select preset ref 6 [17] Select preset ref 7 [18] Select ramp 1 [19] Select ramp 2 [22] Run [23] Run reverse [24] Stop [26] Dcstop 8 [27] Coast [28] Freeze output [29] Start timer 0 [30] Start timer 1 [31] Start timer 2 [32] Set digital out A low [33] Set digital out B low [34] Set digital out C low [35] Set digital out D low [36] Set digital out E low [37] Set digital out F low [38] Set digital out A high [39] Set digital out B high [40] Set digital out C high [41] Set digital out D high [42] Set digital out E high [43] Set digital out F high [60] Reset Counter A [61] Reset Counter B [70] Start Timer 3 [71] Start Timer 4 [72] Start Timer 5 [73] Start Timer 6 [74] Start Timer MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

112 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive NOTE! For choices [32] - [43], see also par. group 5-3*, Digital Outputs and 5-4*, Relays OFF Time Array [10] Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the OFF time for the timed action. NOTE! The adjustable frequency drive has no backup of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default ( :00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with backup is installed. In par Clock Fault, it is possible to program a warning for cases when the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down OFF Action Array [10] Option: [0] * DISABLED [1] No action [2] Select set-up 1 [3] Select set-up 2 [4] Select set-up 3 [5] Select set-up 4 [10] Select preset ref 0 [11] Select preset ref 1 [12] Select preset ref 2 [13] Select preset ref 3 [14] Select preset ref 4 [15] Select preset ref 5 [16] Select preset ref 6 [17] Select preset ref 7 [18] Select ramp 1 [19] Select ramp 2 [22] Run [23] Run reverse [24] Stop [26] Dcstop [27] Coast [28] Freeze output [29] Start timer 0 [30] Start timer 1 [31] Start timer 2 Select the action during OFF Time. See par SL Controller Action for descriptions of the options. 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-41

113 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 [32] Set digital out A low [33] Set digital out B low [34] Set digital out C low [35] Set digital out D low [36] Set digital out E low [37] Set digital out F low [38] Set digital out A high [39] Set digital out B high [40] Set digital out C high [41] Set digital out D high [42] Set digital out E high [43] Set digital out F high [60] Reset Counter A [61] Reset Counter B [70] Start Timer 3 [71] Start Timer 4 [72] Start Timer 5 [73] Start Timer 6 [74] Start Timer Occurrence Array [10] Option: [0] * All days [1] Working days [2] Non-working days [3] Monday [4] Tuesday [5] Wednesday [6] Thursday [7] Friday [8] Saturday [9] Sunday Select the day(s) to which the timed action applies. Specify working/non-working days in par Working Days, par Additional Working Days and par Additional Non-Working Days Water Application Functions, 29-** The group contains parameters used for monitoring water/wastewater applications Pipe Fill Enable Option: [0] * Disabled Select Enabled to fill pipes at a user-specified rate. [1] Enabled Select Enabled to fill pipes with a user specified rate MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

114 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Pipe Fill Speed [RPM] Range: Speed Low [Speed Low Limit - Speed High Lim- Limit* it] Pipe Fill Speed [Hz] Range: Motor [Speed Low Limit - Speed High Lim- Speed Low it] Limit* Set the filling speed for filling horizontal pipe systems. The speed can be selected in Hz or RPM depending on the choices made in par / par (RPM) or in par / par (Hz). Set the filling speed for filling horizontal pipe systems. The speed can be selected in Hz or RPM depending on the choices made in par / par (RPM) or in par / par (Hz) Pipe Fill Time Range: 0 s* [ s] Set the specified time for pipe filling of horizontal pipe systems Pipe Fill Rate Range: units/ s* [ units/s] Specifies the filling rate in units/second using the PI controller. Filling rate units are feedback units/ second. This function is used for filling vertical pipe systems but will be active when the filling time has expired, no matter what, until the pipe fill setpoint set in par is reached Filled Setpoint Range: 0 s* [ ,999 s] Specifies the filled setpoint at which the pipe fill function will be disabled and the PID controller will take control. This function can be used both for horizontal and vertical pipe systems. 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-43

115 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8.3 Parameter Options Default Settings Changes during operation: TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while the adjustable frequency drive is in operation, and FALSE means that the adjustable frequency drive must be stopped before a change can be made. 4 set-up: 'All set-up': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i. e., one single parameter can have four different data values. 1 set-up : data value will be the same in all set-ups. SR: Size related N/A: No default value available. Conversion index: This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of an adjustable frequency drive. Conv. index Conv. factor 1 1/ Data type Description Type 2 Integer 8 Int8 3 Integer 16 Int16 4 Integer 32 Int32 5 Unsigned 8 Uint8 6 Unsigned 16 Uint16 7 Unsigned 32 Uint32 9 Visible String VisStr 33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2 35 Bit sequence of 16 Boolean variables V2 54 Time difference w/o date TimD 8-44 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

116 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Operation/Display 0-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 0-0* Basic Settings 0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint Local Mode Unit [0] As Motor Speed Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8 0-1* Set-up Operations 0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32 0-2* LCP Display 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1601 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 1.2 Small 1662 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 1.3 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 3 Large 1652 All set-ups TRUE - Uint My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16 0-3* LCP Cust. Readout 0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint Custom Readout Min Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Custom Readout Max Value CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-38 Display Text 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-39 Display Text 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-4* LCP Keypad 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 0-5* Copy/Save 0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-45

117 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 0-6* Password 0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint Access to Personal Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8 0-7* Clock Settings 0-70 Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-71 Date Format [0] YYYY-MM-DD 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Time Format [0] 24 h 1 set-up TRUE - Uint DST/Summertime [0] OFF 1 set-up TRUE - Uint DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-79 Clock Fault null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Working Days null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 8-46 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

118 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Load/Motor 1-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 1-0* General Settings 1-00 Configuration Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint Motor Control Principle null All set-ups FALSE - Uint Torque Characteristics [3] Auto Energy Optim. VT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 1-1* Motor Selection 1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchronous All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 1-2* Motor Data 1-20 Motor Power [kw] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint Motor Rotation Check [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 1-3* Addl. Motor Data 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Stator Reactance (Xs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8 1-5* Load-Indep. Setting 1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16 1-6* Load-Depend. Settg Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Slip Compensation 0 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Resonance Dampening Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8 1-7* Start Adjustments 1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Start Current 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-47

119 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 1-8* Stop Adjustments 1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Trip Speed Low [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Trip Speed Low [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16 1-9* Motor Temperature 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [4] ETR trip 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

120 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Brakes 2-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 2-0* DC Brake 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16 2-1* Brake Energy Funct Brake Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Brake Power Limit (kw) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint AC Brake Max. Current % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Over-voltage Control [2] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-49

121 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Reference / Ramps 3-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 3-0* Reference Limits 3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 3-1* References 3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Reference 1 Source [1] Analog input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Reference 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16 3-4* Ramp Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 3-5* Ramp Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 3-8* Other Ramps 3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Initial Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Check Valve Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Final Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16 3-9* Digital Pot. meter 3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp Time 1.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Minimum Limit 0 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD 8-50 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

122 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Limits / Warnings 4-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 4-1* Motor Limits 4-10 Motor Speed Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Torque Limit Generator Mode % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16 4-5* Adj. Warnings 4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Warning Speed High outputspeedhighlimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Warning Reference Low N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Reference High N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Feedback Low ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Feedback High ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Missing Motor Phase Function [2] Trip 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 4-6* Speed Bypass 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Bypass Speed to [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-51

123 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Digital In/Out 5-** Type Par. No. 01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16 5-5* Pulse Input 5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Pulse Filter Time Constant # ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Pulse Filter Time Constant # ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16 5-6* Pulse Output 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max Freq # Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max Freq # Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/ Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32 5-9* Bus Controlled 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

124 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Analog In/Out 6-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 6-0* Analog I/O Mode 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-1* Analog Input Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 53 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 53 Low Current 4.00 ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 53 High Current ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-2* Analog Input Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 54 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 54 Low Current 4.00 ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 54 High Current ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-3* Analog Input X30/ Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/11 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-4* Analog Input X30/ Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/12 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-5* Analog Output Terminal 42 Output [100] Output freq All set-ups TRUE - Uint Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 42 Output Max Scale % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16 6-6* Analog Output X30/ Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-53

125

VLT® 5000/5000 Flux/6000 HVAC/8000 AQUA ... - Danfoss

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Chapter 1 ■ Introduction .......................................................... 3

About this manual .................................................... 3

Assumptions ............................................................ 3

Background knowledge........................................... 3

Additional literature ................................................. 4

Chapter 2 ■ Quick start............................................................. 5

Profibus DP ............................................................. 5

Chapter 3 ■ The PROFIBUS option card ................................ 6

Master-controlled drives .......................................... 6

Cable lengths and number of nodes ...................... 6

Physical connection ................................................. 7

LEDs ........................................................................ 9

Address switches ................................................... 10

Chapter 4 ■ Timing .................................................................. 12

VLT response time behaviour ................................ 12

Time behaviour during system updates ................ 12

Chapter 5 ■ PPO description .................................................. 13

Communication connections ................................. 13

PPO description (overview) .................................... 13

Chapter 6 ■ PCA interface ...................................................... 14

Chapter 7 ■ Parameters and data type structures ............. 15

Chapter 8 ■ Spontaneous messages ..................................... 17

Chapter 9 ■ SYNC and FREEZE .............................................. 17

Chapter 10 ■ Control word/status word ................................ 19

Chapter 11 ■ Bus reference value............................................ 2 4

Chapter 12 ■ Examples ............................................................. 2 5

Example 1: PCV portion and control word /

reference value ...................................................... 25

Example 2: Process data from the VLT ................. 27

Example 3: Array treatment ................................... 28

Chapter 13 ■ GSD file ................................................................ 2 9

Chapter 14 ■ Parameters .......................................................... 3 0

Chapter 15 ■ Warning and alarm messages .......................... 3 8

Warning and alarm messages ............................... 38

Spontaneous messages ......................................... 38

Additional display readings ................................... 39

Chapter 16 ■ Parameter list ...................................................... 4 0

Chapter 17 ■ Appendix ............................................................. 47

Glossary ................................................................. 47

Abbreviations used................................................ 48

Subject index ........................................................ 49

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

Contents


Introduction

■ Introduction

Copyrights, Limitation of Liability and Revision

Rights

This publication contains information proprietary to

Danfoss A/S. By accepting and using this manual

the user agrees that the information contained

herein will be used solely for operating equipment

of Danfoss A/S or equipment from other vendors

provided that such equipment is intended for

communication with Danfoss equipment over a

INTERBUS serial communication link. This publication

is protected under the Copyright laws of

Denmark and most other countries.

Danfoss A/S does not warrant that a software program

produced according to the guidelines provided

in this manual will function properly in every

physical, hardware or software environment.

Although Danfoss A/S has tested and reviewed the

documentation within this manual, Danfoss A/S

makes no warranty or representation, either express

or implied, with respect to this documentation,

including its quality, performance, or fitness

for a particular purpose.

In no event shall Danfoss A/S be liable for direct,

indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages arising out of the use, or the inability to

use information contained in this manual, even if

advised of the possibility of such damages. In particular,

Danfoss A/S is not responsible for any

costs including but not limited to those incurred as

a result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage

of equipment, loss of computer programs, loss of

data, the costs to substitute these, or any claims

by third parties.

Danfoss A/S reserves the right to revise this publication

at any time and to make changes in its contents

without prior notice or any obligation to notify

previous users of such revisions or changes.

2

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

NB!

Note regarding Profibus FMS

This manual does not deal with Profibus

FMS, only with Profibus DP. However, in the event

that the communication is to be built up through

Profibus FMS, you should request the description

MG.10.E3.yy ”Profibus Product Manual“ which also

contains a description of the Profibus FMS functions

of the Profibus option card.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ About this manual

This manual is intended as both an instruction manual

and a reference guide. It only broaches the

basics of the PROFIBUS DP protocol, and only

when it is necessary to provide a sufficient understanding

of the PROFIDRIVE implementation of

the PROFIBUS profile for variable speed drives

(version 2, PNO) and of the PROFIBUS option card

for the series VLT 5000/VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000

HVAC/VLT 8000AQUA by DANFOSS.

In addition, the manual is intended to serve as a

guidebook for the specification and optimization of

the existing communication system.

It is suggested that readers who are not completely

familiar with PROFIBUS DP or the profile for variable

speed drives review the relevant literature on

these subjects.

Even experienced PROFIBUS programmers should

read the entire manual prior to programming, since

every chapter of the manual contains important

information.

Chapter 2 deals with the quick start of the communication

parameters for the DP communication.

Chapter 3 contains details regarding the

PROFIBUS option card and the establishment of

the physical connection.

Please refer to chapter 4 for information regarding

the time behaviour.

Chapter 5 presents an overview of the PPOs (informative

data telegrams).

The PCA interface as a parameter interface in the

PPO is explained in chapter 6.

Chapter 7 contains the description of the parameter

and data structure.

Chapter 8 contains a description of spontaneous

messages.

The response to the ”Sync” and ”Freeze”

commands is explained in chapter 9.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Chapter 12 contains examples for the use of the

PPOs. It is recommended that readers review the

examples for a better understanding of the PPOs.

Comments regarding the GSD file can be found in

chapter 13.

Chapter 14 contains the VLT parameters specific to

the Profibus.

Warning and alarm messages and display readings

specific to the Profibus are described in chapter

15.

A parameter listing as an overview of all VLT 5000/

VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000HVAC/VLT 8000AQUA

parameters can be found in chapter 16.

In chapter 17 you will find the abbreviations used

in this manual. The manual concludes with a short

glossary and a detailed index for quick navigation.

If you are interested in learning more about the

PROFIBUS protocol in general, we recommend

that you consult the relevant, very comprehensive

literature for this purpose.

■ Assumptions

The manual assumes that you are using a

DANFOSS PROFIBUS option card with field bus,

together with a DANFOSS VLT frequency converter,

that you are using a PLC or a PC with a serial

interface as master which supports all

communication services for PROFIBUS, and that

all requirements are met and all limitations are

observed which arise from the PROFIBUS standard,

the PROFIBUS profile of variable speed drives,

and the company-specific implementation of

PROFIDRIVE, or those of the VLT drives.

■ Background knowledge

The DANFOSS PROFIBUS option card is designed

for the communication with all masters that comply

with the PROFIBUS standard. Thus, the assumption

is made that you are familiar with the PC or

PLC to be used as a master on your system. Any

questions regarding the hardware or software of

other suppliers are beyond the scope of this manual

and outside the responsibility of DANFOSS.

The control word and status word as essential

elements of the PPOs for the operational control, In the event of questions concerning the configura-

as well as the bus reference value are explained in tion of the master-to-master communication or the

chapter 11.

configuration with a slave not manufactured by

DANFOSS, you should refer to the information in

the respective manuals.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

Introduction


Quick start

■ Quick start

Details regarding the programming of the usual VLT

parameters may be gathered from the manual for

the VLT 5000/VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000HVAC/VLT

8000AQUA series.

The communication is established by setting the

parameters indicated below.

Details regarding the adjustment of the master are

provided by the master manual and by those

chapters in this manual that deal with the particulars

of the VLT PROFIBUS interface.

4

The required GSD file is available on the

internet at http://www.danfoss-sc.de.

■ Profibus DP

Parameter 904

This selects the desired informative data telegram

(PPO).

Parameter 918

This sets the address of the VLT station – one

specific address per VLT.

Parameter 801

This determines the transmission speed in bit/s.

The standard setting is 1.5 MBaud.

Parameter 502 = ”BUS“.

As an alternative to the switching of terminal 27, the

parameter 502 may be set to ”BUS“ in the factory

setting before the motor can even be started.

Please note the logic links of the parameters 502-

508 to the clamping functions which are also

active in the Profibus. (See operations manual for

an explanation.)

The VLT must be switched off/on once after

the Profibus parameters have been set.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

When configuring the PPO types, a distinction

is made between module consistency and

word consistency:

Module consistency means that a specific portion

of the PPO is defined as a connected module.

The parameter interface (PCV, length of 8 bytes) of

the PPO always has module consistency.

Word consistency means that a specific portion of

the PPO is divided into individual data sectors of

word length (16 bits).

The process data of the PPO may have either

module consistency or word consistency, as

desired.

Some PLCs, such as Siemens S7, require special

functions to call modules that are longer than 4

bytes (in the case of Siemens: ”SFC”, see master

manual).

This means that the PCV interfaces of the PPOs

can only be called through the SFC functions in

the case of Siemens (S7).

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Master-controlled drives

The PROFIBUS option card allows an enormous

flexibility of the control, diagnosis and parameterization

of variable speed drives. The PROFIBUS

card behaves like a part of the VLT and enables

access to all parameters that are important for the

respective application. The variable speed drive

always acts as slave and is capable of exchanging

a multitude of commands and pieces of information

together with the master. Control signals such

as ”speed reference value”, ”start/stop” of the motor,

”reversion” are transmitted by the master in the

form of telegrams.

The VLT confirms the receipt by transmitting status

signals such as ”operation enabled”, ”reference

value reached”, ”motor stopped” etc. to the master.

The drive can also report errors and transmit alarm

and warning messages, e.g. ”VLT error” or ”excess

current”.

The PROFIBUS option card transmits signals in

accordance with the PROFIBUS field bus standard,

EN 50170, part 3. It can thus exchange data with all

masters that meet this standard; however, this

does not mean that all services available in the

PROFIBUS standard are supported. The PROFIBUS

profile for variable speed drives (version 2, PNO) is

a part of PROFIBUS which supports only those

services that concern applications with speed

control.

PROFIDRIVE is an implementation of the profile

developed by DANFOSS and several other firms.

Communications partner

The variable speed drive always acts as slave in a

control system and may thus exchange data with

one or more masters, depending on the type of the

application. The master may be a PLC or a PC with

a PROFIBUS communications

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Cable lengths and number of nodes

The maximum cable length of a segment depends

on the transmission speed. The total cable length

includes stub lines, if applicable. A stub line is the

connection from the main bus cable to each node

if a ”T” connection exists instead of a direct connection

of the main bus cable to the nodes; cf. the

stub line length. The following table shows the

maximum permitted cable lengths and the maximum

number of nodes or VLTs with 1, 2, 3 or 4 bus

segments.

Please note that a repeater switched between two

segments represents a node in both segments. The

number of VLTs is based on a system with only one

master. In the case of multiple masters, the number

of VLTs must be reduced accordingly.

The total stub line length of a segment is limited as

follows:

Stub line length

Transmission Max. stub line length

speed per segment

[m]

9,6-93,75 kBaud 96

187,5 kBaud 75

500 kBaud 30

1,5 MBaud 10

3-12 MBaud none

Maximum total bus cable length

1 segment: 2 segments: 3 segments: 4 segments:

32 nodes 64 nodes 96 nodes 128 nodes

Transmission (31 VLTs) (1 repeater, 61 VLTs) (2 repeater, 91 VLTs) (3 repeater, 121 VLTs)

speed [m] [m] [m] [m]

9,6-187,5 kBaud 1000 2000 3000 4000

500 kBaud 400 800 1200 1600

1,5 MBaud 200 400 600 800

3-12 MBaud 100 200 300 400

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

The indicated lengths in the tables are valid on the

condition that bus cables with the following properties

are used:

– Impedance: 135 to 165 Ohm at a measuring

frequency of 3 to 20 MHz

– Resistance: < 110 Ohm/km

– Capacity: < 30 pF/m

– Damping: max. 9 dB across the entire cable

length

– Cross-section: max. 0,34 mm pursuant to

AWG 22

– Wire type: twisted pair, 1 x 2 or 2 x 2 or 1 x 4

conductors

– Shielding: copper-braided or braided and

foil laminated

■ Physical connection

The PROFIBUS option card will be connected to

the bus line (data line) at terminals 62 and 63.

Data line ”B” (TxD/RxD-P) will be connected to

terminal 62 and data line ”A” (TxD/RxD-N) to terminal

63. A master with a voltaically insulated bus

driver and overvoltage protection (e.g. Z diode) is

recommended.

Protective measures for EMC

It is recommended to carry out the following protective

measures for EMC in order to ensure a

trouble-free operation of the PROFIBUS network.

Additional notes concerning the subject of EMC

can be found in the project manual for the

VLT5000 series (MG.50.Cx.yy) and in the manual for

the Profibus master.

6

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

It is recommended to use the same cable type

throughout the entire network in order to avoid

mismatches of the impedance.

The figures in the following description indicate the

maximum permitted number of stations in each

segment. These figures do not refer to the station

addresses, since each station in the network must

have an unambiguous address.

Segment 1

Segment 2

Segment 3

Segment 4

The applicable national and local regulations,

for example with respect to protective

earthing, must be observed.

Cable setup

The PROFIBUS communications cable must be

kept at a distance from the motor and braking

resistance cables in order to avoid high-frequency

line failures from one cable to another. As a rule, a

distance of 200 mm is sufficient. In general, it is a

good idea to keep the greatest possible distance

between the cables, especially if they run parallel

for an extended distance.

If the PROFIBUS cable has to cross a motor and

braking resistance cable, it should occur at a

90 degree angle.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Connection of the cable screening

The shielding of the PROFIBUS cable always needs

to be of a large-area, low-impedance type on both

sides. As a matter of principle, the screen should be

put up with a large area and low impedance at all

PROFIBUS stations. It is very important to have an

earth connection with low impedance even at high

frequencies. This can be achieved by connecting

the shield surface to earth, for example with the

help of a cable bow or a conductive cable

connector.

The VLT is equipped with various terminals and

supports in order to provide a flawless shielding of

the PROFIBUS cable. The shield connection is

shown in the following diagram.

Diagram, bus connection

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

4

Earthing

It is important to connect all stations linked to the

PROFIBUS network to the same earth potential.

The earthing must have a low high-frequency impedance.

This can be achieved by connecting a

protective housing surface which is as large as

possible to earth, for example by mounting the VLT

to a conductive rear wall.

Especially in the case of large distances between

the stations of a PROFIBUS network, the additional

use of potential equalization cables to connect

the individual stations to the same earth potential

may be necessary.

Bus connection

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

It is important to terminate the bus line correctly.

Mismatches of the impedance may lead to reflections

in the line and cause incorrect transmissions.

– The PROFIBUS option card is equipped with a

suitable termination which can be activated by

the switches 1 and 2 at the switch block S1

directly to the right above the terminal block

MK 1B. The bus termination is active when the

switch is in the ”ON” position.

8

The switches must never be set in opposite

directions. Both switches must be set

to ON or OFF.

– Most masters and repeaters are equipped with

their own termination.

– If an internal termination circuit in the form of

three resistors is connected to the bus line, a

5 V direct voltage must be used. Attention:

please make sure that it is voltaically separated

from the power supply cable.

The PROFIBUS option card

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ LEDs

There are four LEDs on the PROFIBUS option

card:

LD1 and LD4: Flickering (very rapid blinking),

when data are being exchanged

through the option card.

Comment: with each ”flicker” of

the LEDs, the VLT is receiving a

telegram.

LD2 and LD3: Shining, when the option card is

initialized and ready for the data

exchange, or when data are already

being exchanged.

Blinking, when the function for the

automatic baud rate determination

attempts to determine the

current baud rate.

Note: a faulty connection of the

data line may also cause blinking

of the LEDs. (see “Physical connection”).

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Address switches

The station address can be set in parameter 918 or

through a hardware switch (S2, 1-4 and S3, 5-7 on

the PROFIBUS option card).

The setting of an address through parameter 918 is

only possible when the address switches are set to

0 or > 126.

Each slave must have an unambiguous address.

The address is the binary value set for the

switches, cf. the table below. The modification of

the address switches occurs during the next turnon

procedure.

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

6 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

7 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

8 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

9 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

10 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

11 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

12 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

13 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

14 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

15 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

16 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

17 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

18 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

19 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

20 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

21 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

22 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

23 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

24 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

25 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

26 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

27 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

28 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

29 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

30 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

31 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

32 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

33 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

34 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

35 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

36 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

37 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

38 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

39 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

40 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

41 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

42 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

43 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

44 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

45 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

46 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

47 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

48 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

49 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

50 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

51 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

52 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

53 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

54 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

55 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

56 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

57 1 0 0 1 1 1 0

58 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

59 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

60 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

61 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

62 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

63 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

64 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

65 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

10

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

66 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

67 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

68 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

69 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

70 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

71 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

72 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

73 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

74 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

75 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

76 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

77 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

78 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

79 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

80 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

81 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

82 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

83 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

84 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

85 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

86 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

87 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

88 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

89 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

90 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

91 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

92 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

93 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

94 0 1 1 1 1 0 1

95 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

96 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

97 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

98 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

100 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

101 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

102 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

103 1 1 1 0 0 1 1

104 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

105 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

106 0 1 0 1 0 1 1

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

107 1 1 0 1 0 1 1

108 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

109 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

110 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

111 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

112 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

113 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

114 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

115 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

116 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

117 1 0 1 0 1 1 1

118 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

119 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

120 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

121 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

122 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

123 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

124 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

125 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

126 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

127 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Timing

■ VLT response time behaviour

The period for the update through the PROFIBUS

connection can be subdivided into two portions:

1) The communication period, i.e. the time required

to transmit data from the master to the slave

(VLT with PROFIBUS option), and

2) the internal update period, i.e. the time required

to transmit data between the VLT control card

and the PROFIBUS option card.

The communication period (tcom) depends on the

respective transmission speed (baud rate) and the

type of master being used. The shortest achievable

communication period is approximately 30 μsec

per slave with the VLT PROFIBUS option when DP

communication with a data quantity of 4 bytes (PPO

type 3) at 12 Mbaud is used. The communication

period increases with more data or lower

transmission speeds.

The internal update period (t int) depends on the

respective data as there are different channels for

the transmission of data, with time-critical data,

such as the control word, being given the highest

priority. The internal update time for the respective

data types is listed below.

Update

Data time, tint

Control word/main reference value

(Part of PPO) 2 msec.

Status word/respective output frequency

(Part of PPO) 2 msec.

Read parameter through PCD portion of PPO

Write parameter through PCD portion of PPO

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Time behaviour during system update

The system update period is the time required to

update all slaves of the network when cyclical

communication is used.

The update time of a single slave is composed of

both the communication period (depending on the

baud rate) and the station delay (TSDR) in the

slave, and of the delay in the master associated

with the station.

The station delay (TSDR) is the delay time from the

moment when a station receives the last bit of a

telegram to the moment when it sends the first bit

of the next telegram. The station delay is defined

by two parameters: the minimum station delay

(TSDRmin) and the maximum station delay (TSDRmax).

Current station delay for the VLT PROFIBUS option:

– DP: 11 bit times

Current master station delay:

– This information must be provided by the manufacturer

of the respective PROFIBUS master.

Example

– DP master with 1.5 MBaud and PPO type 3

(4 byte data); the assumption here is for 50 bit

times as master TSDR.

Time [msec] Action

0 Master starts data transmission

Last bit received in slave

Slave station delay

Slave starts data transmission

Last bit received in master

Master station delay

(50 bit times » 0.033)

Master ready for data transmission

to next slave

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

Timing


PPO description

■ PPO description

■ Communication connections

Communication pursuant to PROFIBUS DP, i.e.

EN50170 part 3, is supported when DP is selected

in parameter 800.

Accordingly, a master must be used that supports

PROFIBUS DP.

One of the PPOs described below must be used in

the case of DP communication.

■ PPO description (Overview)

A feature of the PROFIBUS profile for variable

speed drives is a communications object designated

as ”PPO”, i.e. ”parameter process data object”.

All cyclical informative data are transmitted via

PPOs. Thus, PPOs form the framework for the data

traffic.

The selection of the PPO type takes place in

parameter 904.

A PPO may consist of a parameter portion and a

process data portion. The parameter portion may

be used for reading and/or updating of parameters

(successively).

The process data portion consists of a fixed part

(4 bytes) and a parameterizable part (8 or 16 bytes).

The control word and speed reference value

are transmitted to the VLT in the fixed portion,

whereas the status word and current output frequency

are transmitted by the VLT. In the parameterizable

portion, the user selects which parameters

are to be transmitted to the VLT (parameter

915) and which are to be transmitted by the VLT

(parameter 916).

Type 1, 2 and 5 consist of the parameter portion

and 4, 12 and 20 bytes of process data respectively.

Type 3 and 4 consist of 4 and 12 bytes of process

data respectively.

12

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

PPO, Parameter Process Data Object

PCD Process Data

PCV Parameter Characteristics Value

PCA Parameter Characteristics (bytes 1, 2);

PCA processing see next chapter.

IND Subindex (byte 3), (byte 4 is not used)

PVA Parameter Value (bytes 5 to 8)

CTW Control Word

STW Status Word

MRV Main Reference Value

MAV Main Actual Value

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ PCA processing

The master controls and monitors VLT parameters

through the PCA portion of the PPOs type 1, 2 and

5 and requests a response from the VLT (slave). In

addition to the parameter processing, the VLT can

also transmit a spontaneous message.

Requests and responses involve an acknowledgement

exchange (a so-called handshake) which

cannot be worked off in stack operation. This

means that the master, when sending a read/write

request, must wait for the response before sending

a new request. A request or response is limited to

a maximum of 4 bytes, i.e. no text strings can be

transmitted.

PCA - Parameter description

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RC MSP PNU

RC: Request/Response Characteristics (Sector: 0-15)

SPM: Toggle bit for spontaneous messages

PNU: Parameter Number (Sector: 1-990)

Request and response

In the RC portion of the PCA word the requests of

the master to the slave are triggered. The other two

PCV fields IND and PVA must be evaluated as

well.

The PVA portion transmits parameter values in

word size with the bytes 7 and 8; double words

require the bytes 5-8, i.e. 32 bits.

If the request or response contains array elements,

the array subindex will be in IND (byte 3). In the

event of a parameter description, IND contains the

record subindex.

RC content

Request Function

0 No request

1 Request parameter value

2 Change parameter value (word)

3 Change parameter value (double word)

4 Request description element

5 Change description element

6 Request parameter value (array)

7 Change parameter value (array word)

8 Change parameter value (array

double word)

9 Request number of array elements

10-15 Not assigned

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Response Function

0 No response

1 Transmit parameter value (word)

2 Transmit parameter value (double

word)

3 Transmit description element

4 Transmit parameter value (array word)

5 Transmit parameter value

(array double word)

6 Transmit number of array elements

7 Request not executable (with error

number, see below)

8 No operating authority for PCV interface

9 Spontaneous message (word)

10 Spontaneous message (double word)

11 Spontaneous message (array word)

12 Spontaneous message (array double

word)

13-15 Not assigned

If a request from the master is not executed by the

slave, the RC word in the PPO-Read has the

value 7. The error number is in bytes 7 and 8 of the

PVA element.

Error no. Meaning

0 Improper PNU

1 Parameter value not changeable

2 Upper or lower value passed

3 Faulty subindex

4 No array

5 Wrong data type

6 Setting not permitted (resettable only)

7 Description element not changeable

8 No PPO-Write for IR

9 Description data not available

10 Access group

11 No parameter operating authority

12 Keyword missing

13 Text not readable in cyclical traffic

14 Name not readable in cyclical traffic

15 Text array not available

16 PPO-Write missing

17 Request temporarily unexecutable

18 Other error

19 Data not readable in cyclical traffic

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 13

PCA interface


Parameters and data type structures

■ Parameters and data type structures

Parameter description

Parameters which are accessible through the parameter

number (PNU) have additional attributes

that are a component of the accompanying descriptive

element.

Writing/reading of a parameter description occurs

through the PCV portion by means of the RC

commands 4/5 and the subindex of the desired

descriptive element (see accompanying diagram).

Characteristics

The “characteristics” subindex extends the definition

of the parameter description. The individual

bits 9 to 15 have the values TRUE [1] or FALSE [0]

(see table below).

14

PNU

Bit Meaning

15 Active parameter

14 Array

13 Parameter value resettable only

12 Factory setting of parameter changed

11 Text available

10 Additional text array available

9 No write access (read only)

8 Lower and upper limit. Standardization

and size attribute not relevant.

0-7 Data type of the parameter corresponds

to OD

The low byte (bit 0-7) indicates the data type of

the parameter (see following table).

The ”data type” for each parameter can be

found in the corresponding column in the

chapter parameter listing.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Caracteristics

"Sub index" 1

Element size

"Sub index" 2

Size attribute

"Sub index" 4

Lower limit

"Sub index" 7

Upper limit

"Sub index" 8

Extended features

"Sub index" 10

Data types supported by VLT

Data Object Short Description

type form

3 5 12 Integer 16

4 5 12 Integer 32

5 5 Unsigned 8

6 5 O2 Unsigned 16

7 5 O4 Unsigned 32

9 5 Visible string

10 5 Byte string

13 5 Time difference 1)

33 5 N2 Standardized value

(16 bit) 1)

35 5 V2 Bit sequence

1) See following page for details

Example: Data type 5 = Unsigned 8

Size attribute

The size attribute is 2 bytes long.

Byte 1 incorporates the physical unit of measurement

(size index), byte 2 the conversion index.

The ”conversion index” for each parameter

can be found in the corresponding column

in the chapter parameter listing.

The ”conversion index” produces the conversion

factor for each parameter.

Example:

Parameter 205: Conversion index = -3 (10E-3)

Conversion factor: 0.001

15200 = 15.200 Hz

An excerpt from the PROFIDRIVE profile with

respect to the assignment of the size index and

the conversion index to the physical size can be

found on the following page.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Time difference (to table ”Objects and data types

supported by the VLT”)

The data type time difference is a measure of time

in milliseconds.

Notation: Time difference

Value range: 0 ≤ i ≤ (2 32 -1) milliseconds [ms]

Coding: The time is represented as a binary

32 bit value (4 bytes). The first

4 (MSB) bits are always zero (see

table below).

Data coding of the data type time difference

Bit Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1

8 0 ms 2 23 ms 2 15 ms 2 7 ms

7 0 ms 2 22 ms 2 14 ms 2 6 ms

6 0 ms 2 21 ms 2 13 ms 2 5 ms

5 0 ms 2 20 ms 2 12 ms 2 4 ms

4 2 27 ms 2 19 ms 2 11 ms 2 3 ms

3 2 26 ms 2 18 ms 2 10 ms 2 2 ms

2 2 25 ms 2 17 ms 2 9 ms 2 1 ms

1 2 24 ms 2 16 ms 2 8 ms 2 0 ms

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Standardized value

A linear value

0% = 0 (0h), 100% are 2 14 (4000h)

Data type N 2

Range -200% ... 200% – 2 –14

Resolution 2 –14 = 0,0061%

Length 2 bytes

Note: Two’s complement notation

MSB is the first bit after the sign bit of the first

byte.

Sign bit = 0 = positive number

Sign bit = 1 = negative number

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Byte 2 SIGN 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8

Byte 1 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0

Physical Size Unit of Abbreviation Conversion Conversion

size index measurement index factor

0 No dimension 0 1

Second s 0 1

-1 0,1

-2 0,01

Time 4 Millisecond ms -3 0,001

Minute min 70 60

Hour h 74 3600

Day d 77 86400

Watt-hour Wh 0 1

Energy 8 Kilowatt-hour kWh 3 1000

Megawatt-hour MWh 6 106 Milliwatt mW -3 0,001

Power Watt W 0 1

9 Kilowatt kW 3 1000

Megawatt MW 6 10 6

Rotation 11 Revolutions per minute RPM 0 1

Torque 16 Newtonmeter Nm 0 1

Kilonewtonmeter kNm 3 1000

Temperature 17 Degree Celsius °C 0 1

Millivolt mV -3 0,001

Voltage 21 Volt V 0 1

Kilovolt kV 3 1000

Milliampere mA -3 0,001

Current 22 Ampere A 0 1

Kiloampere kA 3 1000

Milliohm mOhm -3 0,001

Resistance 23 Ohm Ohm 0 1

Kiloohm kOhm 3 1000

Relation 24 Percent % 0 1

Relative change 27 Percent % 0 1

Hertz Hz 0 1

Frequency 28 Kilohertz kHz 3 1000

Megahertz MHz 6 106 MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 15

Parameters and data type structures


Spontaneous messages

■ Spontaneous messages

The spontaneous message is triggered by the

active parameters 538, 540 or 953.

The PCV response indicates the parameter number

(PNU) and the parameter value (PVA) of the modified

active parameter that triggered the message.

Spontaneous messages are generated when active

parameters are changed, i.e. a message occurs

when a warning appears and when a warning disappears.

At the same time, the VLT modifies the SPM bit (11)

of the PCV word (see ”PCA processing”).

The spontaneous messages are transmitted until

the master has confirmed the receipt of the message

and changed the SPM bit.

Spontaneous messages are only activated

when the parameter 917 is in the ”ON”

position.

In the event of an activated spontaneous message,

the parameter channel is blocked until the spontaneous

message has been acknowledged by the

master.

16

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Example of a spontaneous message

Observation of the parameter channel (PCV) from the PPO (without index field):

PCV (Hex) PVA (Hex) from from Description

Master VLT

12 08 00 00 00 00 x the master requests the current of the VLT

12 08 00 00 00 F0 x VLT current value: 2.4 Amp (parameter 520)

12 08 00 00 00 00 x the master requests the current of the VLT

AC 1A 00 00 00 0A x VLT has a spontaneous message, the spontaneous message

bit is set, the PNU 538 (alarm word) has the value 000A (Hex)

1C 08 00 00 00 00 x the master requests the current of the VLT and acknowledges

the spontaneous message by ”toggling” the SPM in the PCV

1C 08 00 00 00 F0 x VLT current value: 2.4 Amp, the spontaneous message bit

remains at ”1” until the next spontaneous message; the

spontaneous message is acknowledged.

The VLT saves up to 16 consecutively transmitted

SPMs in a FIFO buffer. If only one SPM is in the

FIFO buffer, the VLT immediately resumes normal

operations after the master has acknowledged it

(and the cause of the SPM has been eliminated). If

there is more than one SPM in the FIFO buffer, the

transmission takes place one after the other following

the acknowledgement. Additional SPMs that

are generated while the buffer is full will be

ignored.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ SYNC and FREEZE

The control commands SYNC/UNSYNC

(SYNCHRONIZE/CANCEL SYNCHRONIZATION)

and FREEZE/UNFREEZE are broadcast functions.

SYNC/UNSYNC is used to transmit synchronized

control commands and/or speed reference

values to all connected slaves. FREEZE/UNFREEZE

is used to freeze the status actual value in the

slaves in order to receive a synchronized actual

value from all connected slaves.

The SYNC and FREEZE commands refer to the

PCD and PCV portions of the PPO.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

SYNC/UNSYNC

By using SYNC/UNSYNC, simultaneous responses

of several slaves can be generated, e.g. synchronized

start, stop, or change of the speed. In the

event of a SYNC command, the current control

word and the speed reference value are frozen. Incoming

process data are saved, but are only applied

when a new SYNC command or an UNSYNC

command is made.

The following example shows the speed reference

value sent by the master in the left column and the

respective effective speed reference value for the

three slaves in the three columns to the right.

Current speed reference value slave

VLT VLT VLT

From DP master to address: Address 3 Address 4 Address 5

1. Speed reference value = 50% to address 3 ⇒ 50 % 0 % 0 %

2. Speed reference value = 50% to address 4 50 % ⇒ 50 % 0 %

3. Speed reference value = 50% to address 5 50 % 50 % ⇒ 50 %

4. SYNC command to all addresses ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 50 %

5. Speed reference value = 75% to address 3 ⇒ 50 % 50 % 50 %

6. Speed reference value = 75% to address 4 50 % ⇒ 50 % 50 %

7. Speed reference value = 75% to address 5 50 % 50 % ⇒ 50 %

8. SYNC command to all addresses ⇒ 75 % ⇒ 75 % ⇒ 75 %

9. Speed reference value = 100% to address 3 ⇒ 75 % 75 % 75 %

10. Speed reference value = 50% to address 4 75 % ⇒ 75 % 75 %

11. Speed reference value = 25% to address 5 75 % 75 % ⇒ 75 %

12. UNSYNC command to all addresses ⇒ 100 % ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 25 %

13. Speed reference = 0% to address 3 ⇒ 0% 50% 25%

14. Speed reference = 0% to address 4 0 % ⇒ 0% 25%

15. Speed reference = 0% to address 5 0 % 0 % ⇒ 0%

FREEZE/UNFREEZE

By using FREEZE/UNFREEZE, simultaneous

reading of process data, e.g. output current, by

several slaves can be brought about. At a FREEZE

command, the actual current values are frozen.

When instructed, the slave will send back the

value in effect at the time the FREEZE command

was issued. The respective values are updated

when a new FREEZE command or an UNFREEZE

command is issued.

The following example shows the current values

read by the master in the left column and the

respective effective value of the output current for

the three slaves in the three columns to the right.

Actual output current slave

VLT VLT VLT

DP master reads address: Address 3 Address 4 Address 5

1. Address 3 output current = 2 A ⇐ 2A 3A 4A

2. Address 4 output current = 5 A 2 A ⇐ 5A 2A

3. Address 5 output current = 3 A 3 A 2 A ⇐ 3A

4. FREEZE command to all addresses ⇒ 1A ⇒ 3A ⇒ 3A

5. Address 3 output current = 1 A ⇐ 4A 2A 5A

6. Address 4 output current = 3 A 2 A ⇐ 2A 2A

7. Address 5 output current = 3 A 3 A 1 A ⇐ 2A

8. UNFREEZE command to all addresses

Readout same as for 1, 2 and 3

⇒ 2A ⇒ 3A ⇒ 4A

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 17

SYNC and FREEZE


Control word / Status word

■ Control word / status word

The bits of the ”control word” tell the VLT how to

respond, while the status of the bits in the ”status

word” transmits information about the VLT to the

master.

One can select through parameter 512 whether the

control word and status word are to be defined

according to ”Profidrive” (field bus) or according to

”FC Drive (Danfoss)”. ”FC Drive (Danfoss)” is the

factory setting.

■ Control word according to Profidrive standard

(Parameter 512 = field bus)

The control word is used to send commands from a

master (e.g. a PC) to a slave.

Master ➝ Slave

18

Control

word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 OFF 1 ON 1

01 OFF 2 ON 2

02 OFF 3 ON 3

03 Coasting No coasting

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Save output frequency Ramp possible

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Without function Reset

08 Jogging speed 1 OFF ON

09 Jogging speed 2 OFF ON

10 Data not valid Valid

11 Without function Frequ. correction

DOWN (reduce)

12 Without function Frequ. correction UP

(increase ref. value)

13 Selection setup 1 (lsb)

14 Selection setup 2 (msb)

15 Without function Reversion

If ”Profidrive” has been selected, then a twopart

start command has to be observed when

the start is released (turn-on lock-out: bit 0).

For this it is necessary to first predetermine

Hex 047E and then Hex 047F in the control word,

for example.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Bus

reference

Control

word

Bus

reference

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

0 4 7 E (Hex)

0 4 7 F (Hex)

Bit 00, OFF 1/ON 1

Normal ramp stop using the ramp times of the

parameters 207/208 or 209/210.

Bit 00 = “0” leads to the stop and activation of the

output relay 01 or 04 if the output frequency is

0 Hz if Relay 123 has been selected in parameter

323 or 326.

In the case of bit 00 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 01, OFF 2/ON 2

Coasting stop

In the case of bit 01 = “0”, a coasting stop and

activation of the output relay 01 or 04 occurs if the

output frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

In the case of bit 01 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 02, OFF 3/ON 3

Quick stop using the ramp time of parameter 212.

In the case of bit 02 = “0”, a quick stop and activation

of the output relay 01 or 04 occurs if the

output frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

In the case of bit 02 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 03, Coasting/No coasting

Coasting stop

Bit 03 = “0” leads to a stop.

In the case of bit 03 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 502 determines

how bit 03 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

Bit 04, Quick stop/Ramp

Quick stop using the ramp time of parameter 212.

In the case of bit 04 = “0”, a quick stop occurs.

In the case of bit 04 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 503 determines

how bit 04 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Bit 05, Save output frequency/Ramp possible

In the case of bit 05 = “0”, the current output frequency

is being maintained even if the reference

value is modified.

In the case of bit 05 = “1”, the frequency converter

can perform its regulating function again; operation

occurs according to the respective reference value.

Bit 06, Ramp stop/Start

Normal ramp stop using the ramp times of the

parameters 207/208 or 209/210.

In addition, activation of the output relay 01 or 04 if

the output frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

Bit 06 = “0” leads to a stop.

In the case of bit 06 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 505 determines

how bit 06 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

Bit 07, Without function/Reset

Reset after switching off.

In the case of bit 07 = “0”, no reset occurs.

In the case of a slope change of bit 07 to “1”, a

reset occurs after switching off.

Bit 08, Fixed speed 1 OFF/ON

Activation of the preprogrammed speed in parameter

509 (bus JOG 1). JOG 1 is only possible if

bit 04 = “0” and bit 00 - 03 = “1”.

Bit 09, Fixed speed 2 OFF/ON

Activation of the preprogrammed speed in parameter

510 (bus JOG 2). JOG 2 is only possible if

bit 04 = “0” and bit 00 - 03 = “1”.

If both JOG 1 and JOG 2 are activated (bit 08 and

09 = “1”), then JOG 1 has the higher priority, i.e.

the speed programmed in parameter 509 will be

used.

Bit 10, Data not valid/valid

Is used to notify the VLT5000 series whether the

process data channel (PCD) should respond to

modifications by the master (bit 10 = 1) or not. The

function can be inverted in parameter 805.

NB!

In the case of bit 10 = 0, the VLT does not

respond to the control word or the main reference

value.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Bit 11, Without function/Frequency correction

DOWN

Is used to reduce the speed reference value by the

amount given in parameter 219.

In the case of bit 11 = “0”, no modification of the

reference value occurs.

In the case of bit 11 = “1”, the reference value is

reduced.

Bit 12, Without function/Frequency correction UP

Is used to increase the speed reference value by

the amount given in parameter 219.

In the case of bit 12 = “0”, no modification of the

reference value occurs.

In the case of bit 12 = “1”, the reference value is

increased.

If both – slowing down and accelerating – are

activated (bit 11 and 12 = ”1”), slowing down has

priority, i.e. the speed reference value will be reduced.

Bit 13/14, Setup selection

Bit 13 and 14 are used to choose between the four

parameter setups according to the following table:

Setup Bit 14 Bit 13

1 0 0

2 0 1

3 1 0

4 1 1

The function is only possible if External Selection

has been chosen in parameter 004.

The selection in parameter 507 determines how bit

13/14 is linked with the corresponding function of

the digital inputs.

Bit 15, Without function/Reversion

Reversion of the rotational direction of the motor.

In the case of bit 15 = “0”, no reversion occurs.

In the case of bit 15 = “1”, a reversion takes place.

Please note that the reversion in the factory setting

in parameter 506 has been selected as ”terminal”.

Bit 15 only causes a reversion if bus, bus or terminal

or bus and terminal has been selected (bus and

terminal only in connection with terminal 9, however).

NB!

Unless otherwise indicated, the bit of the control

word is linked with the corresponding

function of the digital inputs as a logical ”or” function.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 19

Control word / Status word


Control word / Status word

■ Status word according to Profidrive standard

The status word is used to notify a master (e.g. a

PC) about the status of a slave

Slave ➝ Master

20

Status

word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1

00 Control not ready Ready

01 VLT not ready Ready

02 Coasting Enable

03 No error Trip

04 ON 2 OFF 2

05 ON 3 OFF 3

06 Start possible Start not possible

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference

09 Local operation Bus control

10 Not in operating range Frequency limit OK

11 No operation Operation

12 VLT OK Stopped, autostart

13 Voltage OK Limit exceeded

14 Torque OK Limit exceeded

15 Timer OK Limit exceeded

Bit 00, Control not ready/ready

In the case of bit 00 = “0”, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “0” (OFF 1, OFF 2 or OFF 3) – or

the frequency converter has switched off (trip).

In the case of bit 00 = “1”, the frequency converter

control is ready, but there is not necessarily a

supply to the power unit present (in the case of

external 24 V supply of the control system).

Bit 01, VLT not ready/ready

Same significance as bit 00, however, there is a

supply of the power unit. The frequency converter

is ready when it receives the necessary start

signals.

Bit 02, Coasting/Enable

In the case of bit 02 = “0”, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “0” (OFF 1, OFF 2 or OFF 3 or

coasting) – or the frequency converter has

switched off (trip).

In the case of bit 02 = “1”, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “1”; the frequency converter has not

tripped.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Output

frequency

Bit 03, No error/Trip

In the case of bit 03 = “0”, no error condition of the

frequency converter exists.

In the case of bit 03 = “1”, the frequency converter

has tripped and requires a reset signal before it

can start.

Bit 04, ON 2/OFF 2

In the case of bit 04 = “0”, bit 01 of the control

word is “1”

In the case of bit 04 = “1”, bit 01 of the control

word is “0”

Bit 05, ON 3/OFF 3

In the case of bit 05 = “0”, bit 02 of the control

word is “1”

In the case of bit 05 = “1”, bit 02 of the control

word is “0”

Bit 06, Start possible/Start not possible

Bit 06 is always ”0” if FC Drive has been selected

in parameter 512. If Profidrive has been selected in

parameter 512, bit 06 will be ”1” after a switch-off

acknowledgement, after activation of OFF2 or

OFF3, and after switching on the mains voltage.

Start not possible will be reset, with bit 00 of the

control word being set to ”0” and bit 01, 02 and 10

being set to ”1”.

Bit 07, No warning/Warning

In the case of bit 07 = “0”, no unusual situation

exists. In the case of bit 07 = “1”, an unusual status

of the frequency converter has occurred. All warnings

are described in the operations manual.

Bit 08, Speed ≠ reference / Speed = reference

In the case of bit 08 = “0”, the current speed of the

motor deviates from the set speed reference value.

This may occur, for example, when the speed is

being changed during start/stop through ramp up/

down.

In the case of bit 08 = “1”, the current speed of the

motor corresponds to the set speed reference

value.

Bit 09, Local operation/Bus control

Bit 09 = “0” indicates that the frequency converter

has been stopped by means of the stop switch of

the control panel, or that Local has been selected

in parameter 002.

In the case of bit 09 = “1”, the frequency converter

can be controlled through the serial interface.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Bit 10, Not in operating range/Frequency limit OK

In the case of bit 10 = “0”, the output frequency is

outside the limits set in parameter 225 and parameter

226 (Warnings: frequency low or frequency

high).

In the case of bit 10 = “1”, the output frequency is

within the indicated limits.

Bit 11, No operation/Operation

In the case of bit 11 = “0”, the motor does not turn.

In the case of bit 11 = “1”, the frequency converter

has a start signal, or the output frequency is higher

than 0 Hz.

Bit 12, VLT OK/Stopped, autostart

In the case of bit 12 = “0”, there is no temporary

overloading of the inverter.

In the case of bit 12 = “1”, the inverter has stopped

due to overloading. However, the frequency

converter has not switched off (trip) and will start

again after the overloading has ended.

Bit 13, Voltage OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 13 = “0”, the voltage limits of the

frequency converter are not exceeded.

In the case of bit 13 = “1”, the direct voltage in the

intermediate circuit of the frequency converter is

too low or too high.

Bit 14, Moment OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 14 = “0”, the motor current is below

the moment limit selected in parameter 221.

In the case of bit 14 = “1”, the moment limit selected

in parameter 221 is exceeded.

Bit 15, Timer OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 15 = “0”, the timers for the thermal

motor protection and thermal VLT protection

(description on page 67) have not exceeded 100%.

In the case of bit 15 = “1”, one of the timers has

exceeded 100%.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Control word according to VLT standard

(Parameter 512 = FC Drive)

The control word is used to send commands from a

master (e.g. a PC) to a slave.

Master➝ Slave

Control

word

Bus

reference

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Reference value external

selection lsb

01 Reference value external

selection msb

02 DC brake Ramp

03 Freewheel No freewheel

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Holding Ramp possible

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Without function Reset

08 Without function Jog

09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

10 Data not valid Valid

11 Without function Relay 01 active

12 Without function Relay 04 active

13 Parameter setup

selection lsb

14 Parameter setup

selection msb

15 Without function Reversion

Bit 00/01

The bits 00 and 01 are used to choose between

the four preprogrammed reference values (parameters

215-218)

according to the following table:

Progr. ref. val. Parameter Bit 01 Bit 00

1 215 0 0

2 216 0 1

3 217 1 0

4 218 1 1

Bit 02, DC brake

Bit 02 = “0” leads to direct voltage braking and

stop. Braking current and duration are set in parameter

125 and 126.

Bit 02 = “1” results in Ramp.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 21

Control word / Status word


Control word / Status word

Bit 08, Activation of the fixed speed in

parameter 213

In the case of bit 08 = “0”, the fixed speed will not

be activated.

In the case of bit 08 = “1”, the motor runs at the

fixed speed.

Bit 09, Ramp selection 1/2

In the case of bit 09 = “0”, ramp 1 is active (parameter

207/208).

In the case of bit 09 = “1”, ramp 2 is active (parameter

209/210).

Bit 11, Relay 01

Bit 11 = “0”: Relay 01 is not activated.

Bit 11 = “1”: Relay 01 is activated, on the pre-condition

that control word bit was selected in parameter

323.

Bit 12, Relay 04

Bit 12 = “0”: Relay 04 is not activated.

Bit 12 = “1”: Relay 04 is activated, on the pre-condition

that control word bit was selected in parameter

326.

22

The description of the other bits can be

found in the section ”control word according

to Profidrive”.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Status word according to VLT standard

The status word is used to notify a master (e.g. a

PC) about the status of a slave.

Slave➝ Master

Status

word

Output

frequency

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Control not ready Ready

01 VLT not ready Ready

02 Coasting Enable

03 No error Trip

04 R e s e r v e d

05 R e s e r v e d

06 R e s e r v e d

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference

09 Local operation Bus control

10 Not in operating range Frequency limit OK

11 No operation Operation

12 VLT OK Stopped, autostart

13 Voltage OK Limit exceeded

14 Torque OK Limit exceeded

15 Timer OK Limit exceeded

Bit 00, Control not ready/ready

Bit 00 = ”0” means that the frequency converter

has switched off due to malfunction.

Bit 00 = ”1” means that the frequency converter

control is ready, but that there is not necessarily a

supply to the power unit present (in the case of

external 24 V supply of the control card).

Bit 02, Coasting/Enable

Bit 02 = ”0” means that the bit 03 of the control

word is ”0” (Coasting) or that the frequency converter

has tripped.

Bit 02 = ”1” means that the bit 03 of the control

word is ”1” and that the frequency converter has

not tripped.

The description of the other bits can be

found in the section ”status word according

to Profidrive”.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Bus reference value

Control

word

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Master➝ Slave

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The frequency reference value is transmitted to the

frequency converter in the form of a 16-bit word.

The value is transmitted in integers (0-32767).

16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%. (Negative

numbers are formed with the aid of the two’s complement.)

The bus reference value has the following format:

Parameter 203 = ”0”

“refMIN-refMAX” 0-16384 (4000 Hex) ~ 0-100% ~ refMIN - refMAX

Parameter 203 = “1”

-refMAX - +refMAX

-16384 (. . . Hex) - +16384 (4000 Hex) ~

-100 - +100% ~ -ref MAX - +ref MAX

Current output frequency

Status

word

Bus

reference

Output

frequency

Slave➝ Master

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The value of the current output frequency of the

frequency converter is transmitted in the form of a

16-bit word. The value is transmitted in integers

(0-32767). 16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%.

(Negative numbers are formed with the aid of the

two’s complement.)

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 23

Bus reference value


Examples

■ Examples

■ Example 1: PCV portion and control word /

reference value

Example for the application of type 1 PPOs to

modify the ramp rise build-up time (parameter 207)

to 10 s and to trigger a start and a speed control of

50% (parameter 512: FC profile = factory setting).

NB!

Modified parameters are only stored permanently

(protected against a mains failure) in

the EEProm of the VLT if parameter 971 is triggered

after the parameter modification.

PPO, Parameter Process Data Object

PCD Process Data

PCV Parameter Characteristics Value

PCA Parameter Characteristics (bytes 1, 2)

PCA processing see below

IND Subindex (byte 3), (byte 4 not utilized)

PVA Parameter Value (bytes 5 to 8)

CTW Control Word

danfoss aqua drive, error 413

Danfoss VLT AutomationDrive FC 360 Quick Manual

Download Manual  of Danfoss VLT AutomationDrive FC 360 Controller, Danfoss aqua drive Unit for Free or View it Online on All-Guides.com.

Thefrequencyconvertermonitorstheconditionofits
inputpower,output,andmotorfactorsaswellasother
systemperformanceindicators.Awarningoralarmmay
notnecessarilyindicateaprobleminternaltothe
frequencyconverteritself.Inmanycases,itindicatesfailure
conditionsfrominputvoltage,motorloadortemperature,
externalsignals,orotherareasmonitoredbythefrequency
converter’sinternallogic.Besuretoinvestigatethoseareas
exteriortothefrequencyconverterasindicatedinthe
6.2 Warning and Alarm Types
Awarningisissuedwhenanalarmconditionisimpending
orwhenanabnormaloperatingconditionispresentand
mayresultinthefrequencyconverterissuinganalarm.A
warningclearsbyitselfwhentheabnormalconditionis
AlarmTripvs.AlarmTripLock
Analarmisissuedwhenthefrequencyconverteris
tripped,thatis,thefrequencyconvertersuspends
operationtopreventfrequencyconverterorsystem
damage.Themotorwillcoasttoastop.Thefrequency
converterlogicwillcontinuetooperateandmonitorthe
frequencyconverterstatus.Afterthefaultconditionis
remedied,thefrequencyconvertercanbereset.Itwill
thenbereadytostartoperationagain.
Atripcanberesetinanyof4ways:
Digitalresetinputcommand
Serialcommunicationresetinputcommand
Veryseriousfaultscausealarmswithtriplockwhich
requirethatinputpowerbecycledbeforeresettingthe
alarminanyofthe4waysdescribedabove.
Warning and Alarm Displays
Illustration6.1WarningandAlarmDisplays
Analarmortrip-lockalarmwillflashondisplayalongwith
Illustration6.2Alarm/TripLockAlarm
Inadditiontothetextandalarmcodeonthefrequency
converterdisplay,therearethreestatusindicatorlights.
Illustration6.3StatusIndicatorLights
AutomationDrive FC 360 Quick Guide
is a registered Danfoss trademark31

1 MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE VLT AQUA Drive FC 200

2 VLT AQUA Drive Contents Contents 1 Error 413 to Read this 1-1 Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights nnodb operating system error number 995 Approvals 1-3 Symbols Error 413 2-1 General Warning 2-2 Before Commencing Repair Work 2-2 Special Conditions 2-2 Caution 2-2 Avoid Unintended Start 2-3 IT Line Power 2-3 Error 413 Stop of the Adjustable Frequency Drive (optional) Introduction 3-1 Type Code String - Medium Power Mechanical Installation 4-1 Before Starting Electrical Installation 5-1 How to Connect 5-1 Line Power Wiring Overview 5-3 Motor Wiring Overview 5-10 DC Bus Connection 5-15 Brake Connection Zebra zm400 error out ribbon 5-16 Relay Connection 5-17 Electrical Installation and Control Cables 5-23 How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation Commissioning and Application Examples 6-1 Quick Set-up 6-1 Start/Stop 6-2 Closed-loop Wiring 6-2 Submersible Pump Application How error 413 Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7-1 Ways of Operation 7-1 How to Operate the Graphical LCP (GLCP) 7-1 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

3 Contents VLT AQUA Drive How to Operate the Numeric LCP (NLCP) 7-5 Tips and Tricks How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 8-1 How to Program 8-1 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations 8-6 Main Menu 8-6 Parameter Options 8-44 Default Settings 8-44 Operation/Display 0-** 8-45 Load/Motor 1-** 8-47 Brakes 2-** 8-49 Reference / Ramps 3-** 8-50 Limits / Warnings 4-** 8-51 Digital In/Out 5-** 8-52 Analog In/Out 6-** 8-53 Comm. and Options 8-** 8-54 Profibus 9-** 8-55 CAN Fieldbus 10-** 8-56 Smart Logic 13-** 8-57 Special Functions 14-** 8-58 Adj. Freq. Drive Information 15-** 8-59 Data Readouts 16-** 8-61 Data Readouts 2 18-** 8-63 Adj, danfoss aqua drive. Freq. Drive Closed-loop 20-** 8-64 Ext. Closed-loop 21-** 8-65 Application Functions 22-** 8-67 Timed Actions 23-** 8-69 Cascade Controller 25-** 8-70 Analog I/O Option MCB ** 8-72 Water Application Functions 29-** 8-75 Bypass Option 31-** Troubleshooting 9-1 Fault Messages Specifications 10-1 General Specifications 10-1 Error 413 Conditions MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

4 VLT AQUA Drive Contents danfoss aqua drive Index 11-1 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

5 Contents VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

6 VLT AQUA Drive 1 How to Read this 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Series Software version: This guide can be used with all FC 200 adjustable frequency drives with software version 1.33 or later. The current software version number can be read from par Software Version, danfoss aqua drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1-1

7 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive Copyright, Limitation of Liability and Revision Rights This publication contains information proprietary to Danfoss. By accepting and using this manual, the user agrees that the information contained herein will be used solely for operating equipment from Danfoss or equipment from other vendors provided that such equipment is intended for communication with Danfoss equipment over a serial communication link. This publication is protected under the copyright laws of Denmark and most other countries. Danfoss does not warrant that a software program produced according to the guidelines provided in this manual will function properly in every physical, hardware or software environment. Although Danfoss has tested and reviewed the documentation within this manual, Danfoss makes no warranty or representation, neither expressed nor implied, with respect to this documentation, including its quality, performance, or fitness for a particular purpose, danfoss aqua drive. In no event shall Danfoss be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages arising out of the use, error 413, or the inability to use information contained in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. In particular, Danfoss is not responsible for any costs, including but not limited to those incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue, loss or damage of equipment, loss of computer programs, error 413, loss of data, the costs to substitute these, or any claims by third parties. Danfoss reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its contents without prior notice or any obligation to notify former or present users of such revisions or changes Available Literature for VLT AQUA DriveFC VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.Mx.yy provides the neccessary information for getting the drive up and running. - VLT AQUA Drive High Power MG.20.Px.yy provides the neccessary information for getting the HP drive up and running. - Danfoss aqua drive AQUA Drive Design Guide MG.20.Nx.yy contains all the technical information about the drive and customer design and applications. - VLT AQUA Drive Programming Guide MN.20.Ox.yy provides information on how to program and includes danfoss aqua drive parameter descriptions. - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Profibus MG.33.Cx.yy - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 DeviceNet MG.33.Dx.yy - Output Filters Design Guide MG.90.Nx.yy - VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 Cascade Controller MI.38.Cx.yy - Application Note MN20A102: Submersible Pump Application - Application Note MN20B102: Master/Follower Operation Application - Application Note MN20F102: Drive Closed-loop and Sleep Mode - Instruction MI.38.Bx.yy: Installation Instruction for Mounting Brackets Enclosure type A5, B1, B2, C1 and C2 IP21, IP55 or IP66 - Instruction MI.90.Lx.yy: Analog I/O Option MCB109 - Error 413 MI.33.Hx.yy: Panel through mount kit x = Revision number yy = Language code Danfoss technical literature is also available online at MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

8 VLT AQUA Drive 1 How to Read this Approvals Symbols Symbols used in this. NOTE! Indicates something to be noted by the reader. Indicates a general warning. Indicates a high-voltage warning. Indicates a default setting MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1-3

9 1 How to Read this VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

10 VLT AQUA Drive 2 Safety 2Safety Safety Note The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever connected to line power, danfoss aqua drive. Incorrect installation of the motor, adjustable frequency drive or serial communication bus may cause damage to the equipment, error 413, serious personal injury or death. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as national and local rules and safety regulations, must be complied with. 2 Safety Regulations 1, error 413. The adjustable frequency drive must be disconnected from line power if repair work is to be carried out. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before removing motor and line power plugs. 2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the control panel of the adjustable frequency drive does not disconnect the equipment from line power and is thus not to be used as a safety switch. 3. Correct protective grounding of the equipment must be established, the user must be protected against supply voltage, and the motor must error reco chain protected against overload in accordance with applicable national and local regulations. 4, danfoss aqua drive. The ground leakage currents are higher than 3.5 ma. 5. Protection against motor overload is set by par Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is desired, set par to data value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value [ETR warning]. Note: The function is initialized at 1.16 x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. For the North American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with Error 413. 6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line power supply while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed danfoss aqua drive removing motor and line power plugs. 7. Please note that the adjustable frequency drive has more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3 when load sharing (linking of the DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 V DC have been installed. Make sure that all voltage inputs have been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before commencing repair work. Installation at High Altitudes Installation at high altitude: V: At altitudes above 10,000 ft [3 km], please contact Danfoss Drives regarding PELV V: At altitudes above 6,600 ft [2 km], please contact Danfoss Drives regarding PELV. Warning against Unintended Start 1, error 413. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local stop, while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. If personal safety considerations make it necessary to ensure that no unintended start occurs, error 413, these stop functions are not sufficient. 2. While parameters are being changed, error 413, the motor may start. Postfix 451 local error, the stop key [RESET] must always be activated; following which data can be modified. 3. A motor that has been connectify cf00b001 error may start if faults occur in the electronics of the adjustable frequency drive, or if a temporary overload or a fault in the supply line power or the motor connection ceases. Warning: Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the equipment has been disconnected from line power. Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing (linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic backup. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 2-1

11 2 Safety VLT AQUA Drive General Warning 2 Leakage Current The ground leakage current from the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 exceeds 3.5 ma. Error 413 to IECa reinforced protective ground connection must be ensured by means of: a min in² [10 mm²] Cu or in² [16 mm²] Error 413 PE-wire, or an additional Error 413 wire - with the same cable cross-section as the line power wiring - must be terminated separately. Residual Current Device This product can cause DC current in the protective conductor. Where a residual current device (RCD) is used for extra protection, only an RCD of Type B (time delayed) shall be used on the supply side of this product. See also RCD Application Note MN.90.GX.02. Protective grounding of the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 and the use danfoss aqua drive RCDs must always follow national and local regulations Before Commencing Repair Work 1. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power. 2. Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and Wait at least the time mentioned above in the section General Warning. 4, danfoss aqua drive. Remove motor cable Special Conditions Electrical Ratings: The rating indicated on the nameplate of the adjustable frequency drive is based on a typical 3-phase line power supply within the specified voltage, current and temperature ranges, which are expected to be used in most applications, danfoss aqua drive. The adjustable frequency drives also support other special applications, which danfoss aqua drive the electrical ratings of the adjustable frequency drive. Special conditions that affect the electrical ratings might be: Single phase applications. High temperature applications which require derating of the electrical ratings On error vba access 2007 applications with more severe environmental conditions. Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide for information about the electrical ratings. Installation requirements: The overall electrical safety of the adjustable frequency drive requires special installation considerations regarding: Fuses and circuit breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit protection Selection of power cables (line power, motor, brake, load sharing and relay) Grid error 413 (IT,TN, grounded leg, danfoss aqua drive, etc.) Safety of low-voltage ports (PELV conditions). Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide for information about the installation requirements Caution The adjustable frequency drive DC link capacitors remain charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid an electrical shock hazard, disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power before carrying out maintenance, danfoss aqua drive. Wait at least as follows before doing service on the adjustable frequency drive: 2-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss error 413 VLT AQUA Drive 2 Safety Voltage (V) Min. Waiting Time (Minutes) hp [ kw] hp [ kw] hp [ kw] hp [0.75 kw 7.5 kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [11 90 kw] hp [ kw] hp [ kw] Be aware that there may be high voltage danfoss aqua drive the The error code is 2318 link even when the LEDs are turned off Avoid Unintended Start NOTE! While the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power, the motor can be started/stopped using digital commands, bus commands, references or via the Local Control Panel. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power whenever personal safety considerations error 413 it necessary to avoid an unintended start. To avoid unintended start, always activate the [OFF] key before changing parameters. Unless terminal 37 is turned off, error 413, an electronic fault, temporary overload, a fault in the line power supply, or lost motor connection may cause a stopped motor to start IT Line Power IT line power Do not connect adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and ground of more than 440 V for 400 V drives and 760 V for 690 V drives. For 400 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), danfoss aqua drive, AC line voltage disk i/o error mac os exceed 440 V between phase and ground. For 690 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 760 V between phase and ground. par RFI 1 can be used to disconnect the internal RFI capacitors from the RFI filter to ground Disposal Instructions Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together with domestic waste. It must be separately collected with electrical and electronic waste according to local and currently valid legislation, error 413. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 2-3

13 2 Safety VLT AQUA Drive Safe Stop of the Adjustable Frequency Drive (optional) 2 For versions fitted with a safe stop terminal 37 input, the adjustable frequency drive can perform the safety function Safe Torque Off (As defined by draft CD IEC ) or Stop Category 0 (as defined in EN ). It is designed and deemed suitable for the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN This function is called safe stop, danfoss aqua drive. Prior to integrating and using safe stop in an installation, a thorough risk analysis must be carried out on the installation in order to determine whether the safe stop functionality and safety category are appropriate and sufficient. In order to install and use the Safe Stop function in accordance error 413 the requirements of Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1, the related information and instructions of the VLT AQUA Drive Design Guide MG.20.NX.YY must be followed! The information and instructions contained in the are not sufficient for a correct and safe use of the safe stop functionality! 2-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

14 VLT AQUA Drive 3 Introduction 3Introduction Type Code String - Medium Power 3 Description Pos.: Possible choice Product group & VLT Series 1-6 FC 202 Power rating hp [ kw] Number of phases 11 Three phases (T) AC line voltage S2: V AC single phase S4: V AC single phase T 2: V AC Terror.net vice city ckachat 4: V AC T 6: V AC T 7: V AC Enclosure E20: IP20 E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1 E55: IP 55/NEMA Type 12 E2M: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/ line power shield E5M: IP 55/NEMA Type 12 w/ line power shield E66: IP66 F21: IP21 kit without backplate G21: IP21 kit with backplate P20: IP20/chassis with backplate P21: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/ backplate P55: IP55/NEMA Type 12 w/ backplate RFI filter HX: No RFI filter H1: RFI filter class A1/B H2: RFI filter class A2 H3: RFI filter class A1/B (reduced cable length) H4: RFI filter class A2/A1 Brake 18 X: No brake chopper included B: Brake chopper included T: Safe Stop U: Safe + brake Display 19 G: Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP) N: Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP) X: No Local Control Panel Coating PCB 20 X. No coated PCB C: Coated PCB Line power option 21 D: Loadsharing X: No line power disconnect danfoss aqua drive 8: Line Power Disconnect + Loadsharing Cable entries 22 X: Standard cable entries O: European metric thread in cable entries 23 Reserved Software release Current software version Software language 28 Table 3.1: Type code description, danfoss aqua drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3-1

15 3 Introduction VLT AQUA Drive 3 Description Pos.: Possible choice A options AX: No options A0: MCA 101 Profibus DP V1 A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet AN: MCA 121 Ethernet IP B options BX: No option BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option BP: MCB 105 Relay option BO:MCB 109 Analog I/O option BY: MCO 101 Extended Cascade Control C0 options CX: No options C1 options 35 X: No options 5: MCO 102 Advanced Cascade Control C option software XX: Standard software D options DX: No option D0: DC backup The various options are described further in this Design Guide. Table 3.2: Type code description. 3-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

16 VLT AQUA Drive 3 Introduction Adjustable Frequency Drive Identification Below is an example of an identification label, error 413. This label is situated on the adjustable frequency drive and shows the type and the options with which the unit is equipped, danfoss aqua drive. See table 2.1 for details of how to read thetype code string (T/C), danfoss aqua drive. 3 Figure 3.1: This example shows an identification label for the VLT AQUA Drive. Please have T/C (type code) number and serial number ready before contacting Danfoss Abbreviations and Standards Abbreviations: Terms: SI units: I-P units: a Acceleration m/s 2 ft/s 2 AWG American wire gauge Auto Tune Automatic Motor Tuning C Celsius I Current A Amp ILIM Current limit Joule Energy J = N m ft-lb, Btu F Fahrenheit FC Adjustable Frequency Drive f Frequency Hz Hz khz Kilohertz khz khz LCP Local Control Panel ma Milliampere ms Millisecond min Minute MCT Motion Control Tool M-TYPE Motor Type Dependent Nm Newton meters in-lbs IM,N Nominal motor current fm,n Nominal motor frequency PM,N Nominal motor power UM,N Nominal motor voltage par. Parameter PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Watt Power W Btu/hr, hp Pascal Pressure Pa = N/m² psi, psf, danfoss aqua drive, ft of water IINV Rated Inverter Output Current RPM Revolutions Per Minute SR Size Related T Temperature C F t Time s s, hr TLIM Torque limit U Voltage V V Table 3.3: Abbreviation and standards table. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3-3

17 3 Introduction VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

18 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation 4 Mechanical Installation 4.1 Before Error 413 Checklist When unpacking the adjustable frequency drive, make sure that the unit is undamaged and complete. Use the following table to identify the packaging: Enclosure type: A2 (IP 20/ 21) A3 (IP 20/21) A5 (IP 55/ 66) B1/B3 (IP20/ 21/ 55/ 66) B2/B4 (IP20/ 21/ 55/66) C1/C3 (IP20/21/ 55/66) C2/C4 (IP20/21/ 55/66) 4 Unit size (kw): V / / / / V / / / / V / / / / V / / - -/ / - Table 4.1: Unpacking table MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-1

19 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Please note that a selection of screwdrivers (phillips or cross-thread screwdriver and torx), a side-cutter, drill and knife is also danfoss aqua drive to have handy for unpacking and mounting the adjustable frequency drive. The packaging for these enclosures contains, as shown: accessory bag(s), documentation and the unit. Depending on options fitted, there may be one or two bags and one or more booklets MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

20 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Front Views A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 IP20/21* IP20/21* IP55/66 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21* IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21* Figure 4.2: Top and bottom mounting holes. (B4+C3+C4 only) Figure 4.1: Top and bottom mounting holes. Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the drives upon delivery. All measurements in mm. * IP21 can be established with a kit as described in the section: IP 21/ IP 4X/ TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit in the Design Guide, danfoss aqua drive. 4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-3

21 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Mechanical Dimensions Mechanical dimensions Frame size (kw): A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C Chassis V T V T V T V T IP /66 21/ 55/66 21/55/ /55/66 21/55/66 20 NEMA Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Chassis Chassis Type 1/12 Type 1/12 Chassis Height (mm) Enclosure A** with de-coupling plate A Backplate A Distance between mount. holes a Width (mm) Enclosure B With one C option B Backplate B Distance between mount. error 413 b Depth (mm) Without option A/B C With danfoss aqua drive A/B Danfoss aqua drive Screw holes (mm) c Diameter ø d Diameter ø e f Max weight (kg) * Depth of enclosure will vary with different options installed. ** The free space requirements are above and below the bare enclosure height measurement A. See section for further information. 4-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

22 VLT AQUA Drive 4 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Mounting All IP20 enclosure sizes as well as IP21/ IP55 enclosure sizes except A2 and A3 allow side-by-side installation. If the IP 21 Enclosure kit (130B1122 or 130B1123) is used on enclosure A2 or A3, danfoss aqua drive, there must be a minimum of 2 in [50 mm] of clearance between drives. For optimal cooling conditions, allow a free air passage above and below the adjustable frequency drive. See table below. Air passage for different enclosures 4 Enclosure: A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4 a (mm): b (mm): Drill holes in accordance with the measurements given. 2. You must provide screws suitable for the surface on which you want to mount the adjustable frequency drive. Re-tighten all four screws. Table 4.2: Mounting frame sizes A5, B1, danfoss aqua drive, B2, B3, error 413, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4 on a non-solid back wall, the drive must be provided with a backplate A due to insufficient cooling air over the heatsink. For heavier drives (B4, C3, C4), use a lift. First wall-mount the 2 lower bolts, then lift the drive onto the lower bolts. Finally, fasten the drive against the wall with the 2 top bolts. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 4-5

23 4 Mechanical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Safety Requirements for Mechanical Installation Pay attention to the requirements that apply to integration and the field mounting kit. Follow the information in the list to avoid serious damage or injury, especially when installing large units. 4 The adjustable frequency drive is cooled by air circulation. To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensured that the ambient temperature does not exceed the maximum temperature stated for the adjustable frequency drive, and that the 24-hour average temperature is not exceeded. Locate error 413 maximum temperature and 24-hour average in the paragraph Derating for Ambient Temperature. If the ambient temperature is in the range of F [45 55 C], derating of the adjustable frequency drive will become relevant, see Derating for Ambient Temperature. The service life of the adjustable frequency drive is reduced if derating for ambient temperature is not taken into account Field Mounting For field mounting the IP 21/IP 4X top/,type 1 kits or IP 54/55 units danfoss aqua drive recommended Panel Through Mounting A Panel Through Mount Kit is available for adjustable frequency drive series, VLT Aqua Drive and. In order to increase heatsink cooling and reduce panel depth, the adjustable frequency drive may be mounted in a through panel. Furthermore, the builtin fan can then be removed. The kit is available for enclosures A5 through C2. NOTE! This kit cannot be used with cast front covers, error 413. No cover or IP21 plastic cover must be danfoss aqua drive instead. Information on ordering numbers is found in the Design Danfoss aqua drive, section Ordering Numbers. More detailed information is available in the Panel Through Mount Kit instruction, MI.33.H1.YY, where yy=language code. 4-6 MG.20.M Danfoss aqua drive is a registered Danfoss trademark

24 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation 5 Electrical Installation 5.1 How to Connect Cables General NOTE! Always comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections. Details of terminal tightening torques. Power (kw) Torque (Nm) Enclosure V V V Line power Motor DC connection Brake Ground Relay A A A B B ) 4.5 2) B B C C2 C3 C Table 5.1: Tightening of terminals 1. For different cable dimensions x/y where x in 2 [95 mm 2 ] and y in 2 [95 mm 2 ]. 2. Cable dimensions above 25 hp [18.5 kw] in 2 [35 mm 2 ] and below 30 hp [22 kw] in 2 [10 mm 2 ] Grounding and IT Line Power The ground connection cable cross-section must be at least in 2 [10 mm 2 ]or 2 rated line power danfoss aqua drive terminated separately according to EN or IEC unless national regulations specify differently. Always comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections. The line power is connected to the main disconnect switch if this is included, error 413. NOTE! Make sure that the AC line voltage corresponds to the AC line voltage of the adjustable frequency drive nameplate. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-1

25 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Figure 5.1: Terminals for line power and grounding. 5 IT Line Power Do not connect 400 V adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and ground of more than 440 V, error 413. For IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 Danfoss aqua drive between phase and ground. 5-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

26 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Line Power Wiring Overview C4 (IP20) C3 (IP 20) C2 (IP 21/IP 55/66) C1 (IP 21/IP 55/66) B4 (IP 20) B3 (IP 20) B2 (IP 21/IP 55/IP 66) B1 (IP 21/IP 55/IP 66) A5 (IP 55/IP 66) A3 (IP 20/IP 21) A2 (IP 20/IP 21) Enclosure: 130BA Motor size (kw): V V V ' V Goto: Table 5.2: Line Power Wiring Table. 5 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-3

27 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for A2 and A3 5 Figure 5.2: First mount the two screws on the mounting plate, slide it into place and tighten fully. Figure 5.3: When mounting cables, first mount and tighten ground cable, danfoss aqua drive. The ground connection cable cross-section must be at least in 2 [10 mm 2 ] or 2 rated line power wires terminated separately according to EN 50178/IEC MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

28 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation 5 Figure 5.4: Then mount line power plug and tighten wires. Figure 5.5: Finally, tighten support bracket on line power wires. NOTE! With single phase A3 use L1 and L2 terminals, error 413. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-5

29 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for A5 5 Figure 5.6: How to connect to line power and grounding without a line power disconnect switch. Note that a cable clamp is used, error 413. Figure 5.7: How to connect to line power and grounding with a line power disconnect switch. NOTE! With single phase A5 use L1 and L2 terminals. 5-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

30 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation AC Line Input Connections for B1, B2 and B3 5 Figure 5.9: How to connect to line power and grounding for B3 without RFI. Figure 5.8: How to connect to line power and grounding for B1 and B2 Figure 5.10: How to connect to line power and grounding for B3 with RFI. NOTE! With single phase B1 use L1 and L2 terminals. NOTE! For correct cable dimensions, please see the section General Specifications at the back of this manual. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-7

31 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive AC Line Input Connections for B4, C1 and C2 5 Figure 5.11: How to connect to line power and grounding for B4. Figure 5.12: How to connect to line power and grounding for C1 and C AC Line Input Connections for C3 and C4 Figure 5.13: How to connect C3 to line power and grounding. Figure 5.14: How to connect C4 to line power and grounding How to Connect Motor - Introduction See section General Specifications for correct dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and length. Use a shielded/armored motor cable to comply with EMC emission specifications (or install the cable in a metal conduit), danfoss aqua drive. Keep the motor cable as short as possible to reduce the noise level and leakage currents. Connect the motor cable shield/armor to both the decoupling plate of the adjustable frequency drive and to the metal of the motor. (The same applies to both ends of the metal conduit danfoss aqua drive used instead of a shield.) 5-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

32 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Make the shield connections with the largest possible surface area (by using a cable clamp or an EMC cable connector). This is done by using the supplied installation devices in the danfoss aqua drive frequency drive, error 413. Avoid terminating the shield by twisting the ends (pigtails), as this will spoil high frequency shielding effects. If it is necessary to break the continuity of the shield to install a motor isolator or motor relay, error 413, the continuity must be maintained with the lowest possible HF impedance. Cable length and cross-section The adjustable frequency drive has been tested with a given length of cable and a given cross-section of that cable. If the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance - and thus the leakage current - may increase, thereby requiring that the cable length e19 canon mp160 error reduced accordingly. Switching frequency When adjustable frequency drives are used together with sine wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a motor, the switching frequency must be set according to the sine wave filter instructions in par Switching Frequency. Precautions while using aluminum conductors Aluminum conductors are not recommended for cable cross-sections less than in² [35 mm²]. Terminals can accept aluminum conductors, but the conductor surface has to be clean, oxidation must be removed, and the area must be sealed by neutral acid-free Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected, error 413. Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after two days due to the softness of the aluminum. It is crucial to ensure that the connection makes a gas tight joint, otherwise the aluminum surface will oxidize error 413. 5 All types of three-phase asynchronous standard motors can be connected to the adjustable frequency drive, error 413. Normally, small motors are star-connected (230/400 V, D/Y). Large motors are delta-connected (400/690 V, D/Y). Refer to the motor nameplate for correct connection mode and voltage. Figure 5.15: Terminals for motor connection NOTE! In motors without phase insulation paper or other insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with the voltage supply (such as an adjustable frequency drive), fit a sine-wave filter on the output of the adjustable frequency drive. (Motors that comply with IEC do not require a sine-wave filter). No Motor voltage 0 100% error 413 AC line voltage. U V W 3 cables out of motor U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 6 cables out of motor, Delta-connected U1 V1 W1 6 cables out of motor, Star-connected U2, V2, W2 to be interconnected separately (optional terminal block) No. 99 Ground connection PE Table 5.3: 3 and 6 cable motor connection. MG.20.M VLT danfoss aqua drive a registered Danfoss trademark 5-9

33 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Wiring Overview C4 (IP20) C3 (IP 20) C2 (IP 21/IP 55/66) C1 (IP 21/IP 55/66) B4 (IP 20) B3 (IP 20) B2 (IP 21/IP 55/ IP 66) B1 (IP 21/IP 55/ IP 66) A5 (IP 55/IP 66) A3 (IP 20/IP 21) A2 (IP 20/IP 21) Enclosure: Motor size (kw): V V V V Goto: Table 5.4: Motor Wiring Table MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

34 VLT AQUA Drive error 413 Electrical Installation Motor Connection for A2 and Error 413 Follow these drawings step-by-step for connecting the motor to the adjustable frequency drive. 5 Figure 5.16: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the plug and tighten them. Figure 5.17: Mount cable clamp to ensure 360 degree connection between chassis and shield; ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the clamp. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-11

35 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Connection for A5 5 Figure 5.18: First, terminate the motor ground, then insert the motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp Motor Connection for B1 and B2 Figure 5.19: Microsoft system management bios driver error terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of error 413 motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

36 Error 413 AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Motor Connection for B3 and B4 Figure 5.20: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and canon pixma mp160 error e5 problem them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. Figure 5.21: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp Motor Connection for C1 and C2 Figure 5.22: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, error 413, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp, danfoss aqua drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-13

37 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Motor Connection for C3 and C4 5 Figure 5.23: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. Figure 5.24: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

38 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation DC Bus Connection The DC bus terminal is used for DC back-up, danfoss aqua drive, with the intermediate circuit being supplied from an external source. Terminal numbers used: 88, 89 5 Figure 5.25: DC bus connections for enclosure B3. Figure 5.26: DC bus connections for enclosure B4. Figure 5.27: DC bus connections for enclosure C3. Figure 5.28: DC bus connections for enclosure C4. Please contact Danfoss if you require further information, error 413. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-15

39 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Brake Connection Option The connection cable to the brake resistor must be shielded/armored. Brake resistor Terminal number Terminals R- R+ NOTE! Dynamic brake calls for extra equipment and safety considerations. For further information, please contact Danfoss Use cable clamps to connect the shield to the metal cabinet of the adjustable frequency drive and to the decoupling plate of the brake resistor. 2. Dimension the cross-section of the brake cable to match the brake current. NOTE! Voltages up to 975 V DC 600 V AC) may occur between the terminals. Figure 5.29: Brake connection terminal for B3. Figure 5.30: Brake connection terminal for B4, error 413. Figure 5.31: Brake connection terminal for C3. Figure 5.32: Brake connection terminal for C MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

40 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation NOTE! If a short circuit in danfoss aqua drive brake IGBT occurs, prevent power dissipation in the brake resistor by using a line switch or contactor to disconnect the line power from the adjustable frequency drive, error 413. Only the adjustable frequency drive should control the contactor. NOTE! Place the brake resistor in an environment free of fire risk and ensure that no external objects can fall into the brake resistor through ventilation slots, error 413. Do not cover ventilation slots and grids Relay Connection To set relay output, see par. group 5-4* Relays. No make (normally open) break (normally closed) make (normally open) break (normally closed) 5 Terminals for relay connection (A2 and A3 enclosures). Terminals for relay connection (A5, B1 and B2 enclosures). MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-17

41 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.33: Terminals for relay connection (C1 and C2 enclosures). The relay connections are shown in the cut-out with relay plugs (from the accessory bag) fitted, error 413. Figure 5.34: Terminals for relay connections for B3. Only one relay input is fitted from the factory. When the second relay is needed, remove the knock-out MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

42 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Figure 5.35: Terminals for relay connections for B4, danfoss aqua drive. 5 Figure 5.36: Terminals for relay connections for C3 and C4, error 413. Located in the upper right corner of the adjustable frequency drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-19

43 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Relay Pcl6 error insufficient memory Relay 1 Relay 2 Terminal 01: common Terminal 02: normal open 240 V AC Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC Terminal 04: common Terminal 05: normal open 400 V AC Terminal 06: normal closed 240 V AC Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in par Function Relay, par On Delay, Relay, error 413 par Off Delay, Relay. Additional relay outputs by using option module MCB Wiring Example and Testing The following section describes how to terminate and access control wires. For an explanation of the function, programming and wiring of the control terminals, please see chapter How to program the adjustable frequency drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

44 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Access to Control Terminals All terminals to the control cables are located underneath the terminal cover on the front of the adjustable frequency drive. Remove the terminal cover with a screwdriver. 130BT248 5 Figure 5.37: Access to control terminals for A2, A3, B3, B4, danfoss aqua drive, C3 and C4 enclosures Remove front cover to access control terminals. When replacing the front cover, ensure proper fastening by applying a torque of 2 Nm, error 413. Figure 5.38: Access to control terminals for A5, B1, danfoss aqua drive, B2, C1 and C2 enclosures MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-21

45 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Control Terminals Drawing reference numbers: pole plug digital I/O pole plug RS-485 bus pole analog I/O. 4. USB connection. 5 Figure 5.39: Control terminals (all enclosures) Control Cable Clamp 1. Use a clamp from the accessory bag to connect the shield to the adjustable frequency drive decoupling plate for control cables. See the section entitled Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables for the correct termination of control cables. Figure 5.40: Control cable clamp MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

46 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Electrical Installation and Control Cables 5 Figure 5.41: Diagram showing all electrical terminals. (Terminal 37 present for units with safe stop function only.) Terminal number Terminal description Parameter number Factory default Terminal Relay No operation Terminal Relay No operation 12 Terminal 12 Supply V DC 13 Terminal 13 Supply V DC 18 Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-10 Start 19 Terminal 19 Digital Input 5-11 No operation 20 Terminal 20 - Common 27 Terminal 27 Digital Input/Output 5-12/5-30 Coast inverse 29 Terminal 29 Digital Input/Output 5-13/5-31 Jog 32 Terminal 32 Digital Input 5-14 No operation 33 Terminal 33 Digital Input 5-15 No operation 37 Terminal 37 Digital Input - Safe Microsoft visual c+ + runtime error win7 42 Terminal 42 Analog Output 6-50 Speed 0-HighLim 53 Terminal 53 Analog Input 3-15/6-1*/20-0* Reference pes 2013 error 1309 hatas? Terminal 54 Analog Input 3-15/6-2*/20-0* Feedback Table 5.5: Terminal connections MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-23

47 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive Very long control cables and analog signals may, in rare cases and depending on the installation, result in 50/60 Hz ground loops due to noise from line power supply cables. If this occurs, error 413, break the shield error 413 insert a 100 nf capacitor between shield and chassis. NOTE! The common of digital / analog inputs and outputs should be connected error 413 separate common terminals 20, 39, and 55. This will prevent ground current interference among groups. For example, it prevents switching on digital inputs from disturbing analog inputs. 5 NOTE! Control cables must be shielded/armored MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

48 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation Note that unintended motor start can occur; make sure no personnel or equipment is in danger! Please follow these steps to test the motor connection and direction of rotation. Start with no power to the unit. Figure 5.42: Step 1: First, remove the insulation on both ends of a in [50 70 mm] piece of wire. 5 Figure 5.43: Step 2: Insert one end in terminal 27 using a suitable terminal screwdriver. (Note: For units with the Safe Stop function, the existing jumper between terminal 12 and 37 should not be removed for the unit to be able to run!) Figure 5.44: Step 3: Insert the other end in terminal 12 or 13, danfoss aqua drive. (Note: For units with the Safe Stop function, the existing jumper between terminal 12 and 37 should not be removed for the unit to be able to run!) Figure 5.45: Step 4: Power up the unit and press the [Off] button. In this state, the motor should not rotate. Press [Off] to stop the motor at any time. Note that the LED on the [OFF] button should be lit. If alarms or warnings are flashing, danfoss aqua drive, please see chapter 7 for more information. Figure 5.46: Step 5: By pressing the [Hand on] button, the LED above the button should be lit and the motor may rotate, danfoss aqua drive. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-25

49 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.47: Step 6: The speed of the motor can be seen in the LCP. It can be adjusted by pushing the up and down arrow buttons. Figure danfoss aqua drive Step 7: To move the cursor, use the left and right arrow buttons. This enables speed changes by larger increments. Figure 5.49: Step 8: Press the [Off] button to stop the motor again. Figure 5.50: Step 9: Change two motor wires if the desired direction of rotation is not achieved. Remove line power from the adjustable frequency drive before changing motor wires MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

50 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation Switches S201, S202, danfoss aqua drive, and S801 Switches S201 (Al 53) and S202 (Al 54) are used to select a current (0-20 ma) or a voltage (0 to 10 V) configuration of the analog input terminals 53 and 54 respectively. Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termination on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69). Please note that the switches may be covered by an option, error 413, if so equipped. Default setting: S201 (AI 53) = OFF (voltage input) S202 (AI 54) = OFF (voltage input) S801 (Bus termination) = OFF 5 Figure 5.51: Switches location. 5.2 Final Optimization and Test Final Optimization and Test To optimize motor shaft performance and optimize the adjustable frequency drive for the connected motor and installation, please follow these steps: Ensure that the adjustable frequency drive and the motor are connected, and power is applied to the adjustable frequency drive. NOTE! Before power-up, ensure that connected equipment error 413 ready for use. Step 1. Locate motor nameplate NOTE! The motor is either star- (Y) or delta-connected ( ). This information is located on the motor nameplate data, error 413. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-27

51 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive 5 Figure 5.52: Motor nameplate example Step 2. Enter the motor nameplate data in the following parameter list. To access the list, first press [QUICK MENU] key, then select Q2 Quick Set-up. 1. Motor Power [kw] or Motor Power [HP] par par Motor Voltage par Motor Frequency par Motor Current par Motor Nominal Speed par Table 5.6: Motor related parameters Step 3. Activate Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Performing an AMA ensures best possible performance. An AMA automatically takes measurements from the specific motor connected and compensates for installation variances. 1, error 413. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or use [MAIN MENU] and set Terminal 27 par to No operation (par [0]) 2. Press [QUICK MENU], select "Q2 Quick Set-up", scroll down to AMA par Press [OK] to activate the AMA par Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If the sine wave filter is mounted, error 413, run only reduced AMA, or remove the sine wave filter during the AMA procedure. 5. Press the [OK] key, error 413. The display should show Press [Hand on] to start. 6. Press the [Hand on] key. A progress bar indicates if the AMA is in progress. Stop the AMA during operation 1. Press the [OFF] key, error 413. The adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode and the display shows that the AMA was terminated by the user, error 413. Successful AMA 1. The display shows Press [OK] to finish AMA. 2, danfoss aqua drive. Press the [OK] key to danfoss aqua drive the AMA state. Unsuccessful AMA 1. Error 413 adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode. A description of the alarm can be found in the Troubleshooting section, error 413. 2. "Report Value in the [Alarm Log] shows the last measuring sequence carried out by the AMA before the adjustable frequency drive entered alarm mode. This number, along with the description of the alarm, will assist in troubleshooting. If contacting Danfoss Service, make sure to mention the number and alarm description MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

52 VLT AQUA Drive 5 Electrical Installation NOTE! An unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly entered motor nameplate data or too big of a difference between the motor and the adjustable frequency drive power sizes. Step 4. Set speed limit and ramp time Set up the desired limits for speed and ramp time. Minimum Reference par Maximum Reference par Motor Speed Low Limit par or 4-12 Motor Speed High Limit par or 4-14 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s] par Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 1 [s] par MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5-29

53 5 Electrical Installation VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

54 VLT AQUA Drive 6 Commissioning and Application Examples 6 Commissioning and Application Examples 6.1 Quick Set-up Quick Menu Mode The GLCP provides access to all parameters listed under the Quick Menus. To set parameters using the [Quick Menu] button: Pressing [Quick Menu] the list indicates the different areas contained in the quick menu. Efficient parameter set-up for water applications The parameters can easily be set up for the vast majority of the water and wastewater applications only by using the [Quick Menu]. The best way to set parameters using the [Quick Menu] is by following the steps below: 1, error 413. Press [Quick Set-up] for selecting basic motor settings, ramp times, etc. 2. Press [Function Set-ups] for setting up error 413 required functionality of the adjustable frequency drive - if not already covered by the settings in [Quick Set-up], error 413. 3. Choose between General Settings, Open-loop Settings and Closed-loop Settings. 6 It is error 413 to do the set-up in the order listed, danfoss aqua drive. Figure 6.1: Quick Menu view, danfoss aqua drive. Par. Designation [Units] 0-01 Language 1-20 Motor Power [kw] 1-22 Motor Voltage [V] 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz] 1-24 Motor Current [A] 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM] 3-41 Ramp 1 Danfoss aqua drive Time [s] 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [s] 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Table 6.1: Quick Set-up parameters. Please see section Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations If No Operation is selected in terminal 27, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27 is necessary to enable start. If Coast Inverse (factory default value) is selected in Terminal 27, a connection to +24V is necessary to enable start. NOTE! For detailed parameter descriptions, please see the following section on Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 6-1

55 6 Commissioning and Application Examples VLT AQUA Drive Start/Stop Terminal 18 = start/stop par [8] Start Terminal 27 = No operation par [0] No operation (Default coast inverse Par Digital Input, Terminal 18 = Start (default) Par Digital Input, Terminal 27 = coast inverse (default) 6 Figure 6.2: Terminal 37: Available only with Safe Stop Function! Closed-loop Wiring Terminal 12 /13: +24 V DC Terminal 18: Start par [8] Start (Default) Terminal 27: Coast par [2] coast inverse (Default) Terminal 54: Error 413 input L1-L3: Line power terminals U,V and W: Motor terminals 6-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

56 VLT AQUA Drive 6 Commissioning and Application Examples Submersible Pump Application The system consists of a submersible pump controlled by a Danfoss VLT AQUA Drive and a pressure transmitter, error 413. The transmitter gives a danfoss aqua drive ma feedback signal to the VLT AQUA Drive, danfoss aqua drive, which keeps a constant pressure by controlling the speed of the pump, error 413. To design a drive for a submersible pump application, there are a few important issues to take into consideration. Therefore, the drive used must be chosen according to motor current. 1. The motor is a what is known as a Can motor with a stainless steel can between the rotor and stator. There is a larger and a more magnetic resistant air-gap than on a normal motor hence a weaker field which results in the motor being designed with a higher rated current than a norm motor with similar rated power. 2. The pump contains thrust bearings which are damaged when run below minimum speed, which is normally 30 Hz. unspecified error steam. The motor reactance is nonlinear in submersible pump motors and therefore Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA) may not be possible. However, normally submersible pumps are operated with very long motor cables that might eliminate the nonlinear motor reactance and enable the drive to perform AMA. If AMA fails, error 413, the motor data can be set from parameter group 1-3* (see motor datasheet). Be aware that if an AMA has been successful, the drive will compensate for voltage drop in the long motor cables, so if the advanced motor data are set manually, the length of the motor cable must be taken into considerations to optimize system performance, danfoss aqua drive. 4. It is important that the system be operated with a minimum of wear and tear of the pump and motor. A Danfoss Sine-Wave filter can lower the motor insulation stress and increase lifetime (check actual motor insulation and the adjustable frequency drive du/dt specification). It is recommended to use a filter to error 413 the need for service EMC performance can be difficult to achieve due to the fact that the special pump cable, which is able to withstand the wet conditions in the well, error 413, is normally unshielded. A solution could be to use a shielded cable above the well and fix the danfoss aqua drive to the well pipe if it is made of steel (can also be made of plastic), danfoss aqua drive. A Sine-Wave filter will also reduce the EMI from unshielded motor cables. The special can motor is used due to the wet installation conditions. The drive needs to be designed for the system according to output current to be able to run the motor at nominal power, error 413. To prevent damage to the thrust bearings of the pump, error 413, it is important to ramp the pump from stop to min. speed as quickly as possible. Well-known manufacturers of submersible pumps recommend that the pump be ramped to a min. speed (30 Hz) in max, error 413. 2 3 seconds. The new VLT AQUA Drive is designed with initial and final ramp for these applications. The initial and final ramps are 2 individual ramps, where Initial Ramp, if enabled, will ramp the motor from stop to min. speed and automatically switch to normal ramp, when min. speed is reached. Final ramp will do the runtime error 255 at from min. speed to stop in a stop situation. Pipe-fill mode can be enabled to prevent water hammering. The Danfoss adjustable frequency drive is capable of filling vertical pipes using the PID controller to slowly ramp up the pressure with a user specified rate (units/sec). If enabled, the drive will enter pipe fill mode, when it reaches min. speed after startup. The pressure will slowly error 413 ramped up until it reaches a user-specified filled setpoint, after which the drive automatically disables pipe fill mode and continues in normal closed-loop operation. This feature is designed for irrigation applications. Electrical Wiring Typical parameter settings (typical/recommended settings in brackets.) Parameters: Motor Rated Power Par / par Motor Rated Voltage Par Motor Current Par Motor Rated Speed Par Enable Reduced Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA in par. 1-29) NOTE! Note htc error 328 analog input 2, (terminal (54) format must be set to ma. (switch 202). MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 6-3

57 6 Commissioning and Application Examples VLT AQUA Drive Min. Reference Par (30 Hz) Max. Reference Par (50/60 Hz) Initial Ramp-up Time Par (2 sec.) Final Ramp-down Time Par (2 sec.) Normal Ramp-up Time Par (8 sec, danfoss aqua drive. depending on size) Normal Ramp-down Time Par (8 danfoss aqua drive. depending on size) Motor Min. Speed Par (30 Hz) Motor Max. Speed Par (50/60 Hz) Use the Closed-loop wizard under Quick Menu_Funtion_Setup to easily set up the feedback settings in the PID controller. Pipe Fill Mode Pipe Fill Enable Par Pipe Fill Rate Par (Feedback units/sec.) Filled Setpoint Par (Feedback units) MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

58 VLT AQUA Drive danfoss aqua drive How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 7.1 Ways of Operation Ways of Operation The Error 413 Frequency Drive can be Operated in 3 Ways: 1. Graphical Local Control Panel (GLCP), see Numeric Local Control Panel (NLCP), danfoss aqua drive, see RS-485 serial communication or USB, both for PC connection, see If the adjustable frequency drive is equipped with the serial communication option, danfoss aqua drive, please refer to the relevant documentation How to Operate the Graphical LCP (GLCP) The following instructions are valid for the GLCP (LCP 102). The GLCP is divided into four functional groups: 1. Graphical display with Status lines, error 413. 2. Menu keys and indicator lights (LEDs) - selecting mode, changing parameters and switching between display functions Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). 4. Operation socket error # 10060 and indicator lights error 413. Graphical display: The LCD display is back lit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. All data is displayed on the LCP, which can show up to five operating variables while in [Status] mode. Display lines: a, danfoss aqua drive. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and graphics. error 413. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data and variables defined or chosen by the user. By pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra line can be added, danfoss aqua drive. c. Status line: Status messages displaying text. The display is divided into 3 sections: Top section (a) shows the status when in status mode, or up to two variables when not in status mode and in the case of an alarm/warning. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-1

59 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The number of the Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up in par. 0-10) is shown, error 413. When programming in another set-up than the Active Set-up, the number of the set-up being programmed appears to the right in brackets. Middle section (b) shows up to 5 variables with related unit, regardless of status. In the case of an alarm/warning, error 413, the warning is shown instead of the variables. It is possible to toggle between three status readout displays by pressing the [Status] key. Operating variables with different formatting are shown in each status screen - see below. Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the displayed operating variables. The values/measurements to be displayed can be defined via par. 0-20, 0-21, 0-22, 0-23, and 0-24, which can be accessed via [QUICK MENU], "Q3 500 internal server error internet explorer Set-ups", "Q3-1 General Settings", "Q3-11 Danfoss aqua drive Settings". Each value / measurement readout parameter selected in par to par has its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal point. Larger numeric values are displayed with few digits after the decimal point. Ex.: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A. Status display I 7 This read-out state is standard after start-up or initialization. Use [INFO] to obtain information about the value/measurement linked to the displayed operating error - audit support not in kernel (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3). See the operating variables shown in the display in this illustration, danfoss aqua drive. 1.1, BP and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 and 3 are shown in medium size Status display II See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2) shown in the display in this illustration. In the example, Speed, error 413, Motor current, Motor power and Frequency are selected as variables in the first and second lines. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in large size. 130BP Status display III: This state displays the event danfoss aqua drive action of the Smart Logic Control. For further information, danfoss aqua drive, see the section Smart Logic Control. 130BP MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

60 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive Bottom section always shows the state of the adjustable frequency drive in status mode. Top section Middle section 130BP Bottom section Display Contrast Adjustment Press [status] and [ ] for error connecting to filter display Press [status] and [ ] danfoss aqua drive brighter error 413 Indicator danfoss aqua drive (LEDs): If certain threshold values are exceeded, danfoss aqua drive, the alarm and/or warning LED lights up, danfoss aqua drive. A status and alarm text appear on the error 413 panel. The On LED is activated when the adjustable frequency drive receives power from AC line voltage, error 413, a DC bus terminal, or an external 24 Error 052 pawno supply. At the same time, the back light is on. Green LED/On: Control section is working. Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning. Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. 7 GLCP keys Menu keys The menu keys error code 0x80004005 win7 divided into functions. The keys below the display and indicator lamps are used for parameter set-up, including choice of display indication during normal operation. 130BP [Status] Indicates the status of the adjustable frequency drive and/or the motor. Three different readouts can be chosen by pressing the [Status] key: 5 crank pos sensor circ error bank readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control. Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing back to display mode from either the quick menu mode, main menu mode danfoss aqua drive alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to toggle single or double readout mode. [Quick Menu] Allows quick set-up of the adjustable frequency drive. The most common functions can be programmed here. The [Quick Menu] consists of: - Q1: My Personal Menu - Q2: Quick Set-up - Q3: Function Set-ups - Q5: Changes Made - Q6: Loggings The function set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of danfoss aqua drive and wastewater applications including variable torque, constant torque, pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer pumps, aeration blowers and other pump and fan applications. Among other features, error 413, it also includes parameters for selecting which variables to display on the LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closedloop single zone and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to water and wastewater applications. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-3

61 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The quick menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par. 0-60, 0-61, 0-65 or It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and main menu mode, danfoss aqua drive. [Main Menu] is used for programming all parameters. The main menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par. 0-60, 0-61, 0-65 or For the majority of water and wastewater applications it is not necessary to access the main menu parameters, but instead the quick menu, quick set-up and function set-ups provide the simplest and quickest access to the typical required parameters. It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and quick menu mode. Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows direct access to any parameter. [Alarm Log] displays an alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1-A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, danfoss aqua drive, use the arrow keys to navigate to the alarm number and press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of the adjustable frequency drive before it enters alarm mode. 7 [Back] reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure. [Cancel] the last change or command will be canceled as long as the display has not been changed. [Info] displays information about a command, parameter, or function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed information when needed. Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel]. Navigation Keys The four navigation arrows are used to navigate between the different choices available in [Quick Menu], error 413, [Main Menu] and [Alarm Log], danfoss aqua drive. Use the keys to move the cursor. [OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter. Operation Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control panel. 130BP MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

62 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive [Hand On] enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the GLCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor, and makes it possible to give the motor speed reference using the arrow keys. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Hand on] Key on LCP. The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated: [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on] Reset Coasting stop inverse (motor coasting to stop) Reversing Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb Stop command from serial communication Quick stop DC brake NOTE! External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a start command via the LCP. [Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be Enabled error 413 or Disabled [0] via par [Off] key on LCP. If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive, the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting the line power supply. 7 [Auto On] enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal rage error xinput1_3.dll applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Auto on] key on LCP. NOTE! An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] [Auto on]. [Reset] is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par Reset Keys on LCP. The cydia sub process error code 1 shortcut can be carried out by holding down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The danfoss aqua drive shortcut allows direct access to any parameter How to Operate the Numeric LCP (NLCP) The following instructions are valid for the NLCP (LCP 101). The control panel is divided into four functional groups: 1. Numeric display. NOTE! Parameter copy is not possible with Numeric Local Control Panel (LCP101). 2. Menu key and LEDs - changing parameters and switching between display functions. 3, error 413. Navigation keys and LEDs. 4. Operation keys and LEDs. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss aqua drive trademark 7-5

63 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Select one of the following modes: Status Mode: Displays the status of the adjustable frequency drive or the error 413. If an alarm occurs, the NLCP automatically switches to status mode, error 413. A number of alarms can be displayed. Quick Set-up or Main Menu Mode: Display parameters and parameter settings. Figure 7.1: Numerical LCP (NLCP) 7 130BP BP Figure 7.2: Status display example Figure 7.3: Alarm display example LEDs: Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on. Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning. Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. Danfoss aqua drive key Select one of the following modes: Status Quick Set-up Main Menu Main Menu is used for programming all parameters. The parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par Main Menu Password, par Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par Personal Menu Password or par Access to Personal Menu w/o Password. Quick Set-up is used to set up the adjustable frequency drive using only the most essential parameters. The parameter values can be changed using the up/down arrows when the value is flashing. Select danfoss aqua drive main menu by pressing the [Menu] key a number of times until danfoss aqua drive main menu LED is lit. Select the parameter group [xx- ] and press [OK] Select the parameter [ -xx] and press [OK] If scratch disks are full photoshop error parameter is an array parameter, select the array number and press [OK] Select the wanted data value and press [OK] Navigation keys [Back] for stepping backwards 7-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

64 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive Arrow [ ] [ ] keys are used for navigating between parameter groups, parameters and within parameters. [OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter, error 413. 130BP Figure 7.4: Display example Operation keys Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the control panel. 130BP Figure 7.5: Operation keys of the numerical LCP (NLCP) [Hand on] enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the LCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor and it is now possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Hand on] Key on LCP, danfoss aqua drive. 7 External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a 'start' command via the LCP. The following control signals will still be active when [Hand on] is activated: [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto on] Reset Coasting stop inverse Reversing Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb Stop command from serial communication Quick stop DC brake [Off] stops the connected motor. The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Off] Key on LCP. If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is error 413, the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the line power supply. [Auto on] enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication. When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start. The key can be Terrors from the clit - 1998 [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Auto on] Key on LCP, danfoss aqua drive. NOTE! An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] [Auto on]. [Reset] is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). The key can be Enabled [1] or Disabled [0] via par [Reset] Key on LCP. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-7

65 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Changing Data 1. Press the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key. 2, error 413. Use [ ] and [ ] keys to find parameter group to edit. 3. Press the [OK] key. 4. Use [ ] and [ ] keys to find parameter to edit. 5, danfoss aqua drive. Press the [OK] key. 6, danfoss aqua drive. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to select the correct parameter setting. Or, to move to digits within a number, use the keys. The cursor indicates the digit selected to be changed. The [ ] key increases the value, the [ ] key decreases the value. 7. Press the [Cancel] key to disregard the change, error 413, or press the [OK] key to accept the change and enter the new setting Changing a Text Value 7 If the selected parameter is a text value, it can be changed by using the up/down navigation keys. The up key increases the value, error 413, and the down key decreases the value, danfoss aqua drive. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK]. Figure 7.6: Display example Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values If the chosen parameter represents a danfoss aqua drive data value, change the chosen data value by means of the [ ] and [ ] navigation keys as well error 413 the up/down [ ] [ ] navigation keys. Use the ] and [ ] navigation keys to move the cursor horizontally. Figure 7.7: Display example. Use the up/down navigation keys to change the data value. The up key increases the data value, danfoss aqua drive, while the down key reduces it. Place the cursor on the value to be saved and press [OK], danfoss aqua drive. Figure 7.8: Display example, danfoss aqua drive. 7-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

66 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Danfoss aqua drive Frequency Drive Changing of Data Value, Step-by-Step Certain parameters can be changed step-by-step or by an infinite number of variables. This applies to par Motor Power [kw], par Motor Danfoss aqua drive and par Motor Frequency. The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric dantex error e1 values, and as numeric data values using an infinite number of variables Readout and Programming of Indexed Parameters Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack, danfoss aqua drive. Par Alarm Log: Error Code to par Alarm Log: Time contain error #2029 adobe air fault log which can be read out, danfoss aqua drive. Error 413 a parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the value log. Use par Preset Reference as another example: Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the indexed values. To change the parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK], danfoss aqua drive. Change the value by using the up/down keys. Press [OK] to accept the new setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the parameter Tips and Tricks 7 * For the majority of water and wastewater applications, the Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-ups provide the simplest and quickest access to all of the typical parameters required. * Whenever possible, performing an AMA will ensure best shaft performance. * Display contrast can be adjusted by pressing [Status] and [ ] for a darker display, or by pressing [Status] and [ ] for a brighter display. * Under [Quick Menu] and [Changes Made], all danfoss aqua drive parameters that have been changed from the factory settings are displayed. * Press and hold the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds to access any parameter. * For service purposes, it is recommended to copy all parameters to the LCP, see par 0-50 for further information. Table 7.1: Tips and tricks Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings when Using GLCP Once the set-up of an adjustable frequency drive is complete, it is recommended to store (backup) the parameter sd connect error in the GLCP or on a PC via Error 413 10 Set-up Software Tool, error 413. NOTE! Stop the motor before performing any of these operations. Data storage in LCP: 1. Go to par LCP Copy 2, error 413. Press the [OK] key. 3. Select All to LCP 4. Press the [OK] key. All parameter settings are now stored in the GLCP indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-9

67 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT Danfoss aqua drive Drive The GLCP can now be connected to another adjustable frequency drive and the parameter settings copied to this adjustable frequency drive. Data transfer from LCP to adjustable frequency drive: 1. Go to par LCP Copy 2, danfoss aqua drive. Press the [OK] key. 3. Danfoss aqua drive All from LCP 4. Press the [OK] key, error 413. The parameter settings stored in the GLCP are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive indicated by error 413 progress bar, error 413. When 100% is reached, press [OK] Initialization to Default Settings There are two ways to initialize the adjustable frequency drive to default: Recommended initialization and manual initialization. Please be aware that they have different impacts according to the below description. 7 Recommended initialization (via par Operation Mode) 1. Select par Operation Mode 2. Press [OK] 3. Select Initialization (for NLCP select 2 ) 4. Press [OK] 5, danfoss aqua drive. Disconnect the power from the unit and wait for the display to turn off, danfoss aqua drive. 6. Reconnecting the power resets the adjustable frequency drive. Note that first start-up takes a few more seconds 7. Press [Reset] par Operation Mode initializes all except: par RFI 1 par Protocol par Address par Baud Rate par Minimum Response Delay par Max Response Delay par Max Inter-Char Delay par Operating Hours to par Over Volts par Historic Log: Even to par Historic Log: Time par Alarm Log: Error Code to par Alarm Log: Time NOTE! Parameters selected in par My Personal Menu will remain present with the default factory setting. Manual initialization NOTE! When carrying out manual initialization, serial communication, RFI filter settings and fault log settings are reset. Removes parameters selected in par My Personal Menu 1. Disconnect from the line power and wait until the display turns off. 2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same time while powering up the Graphical LCP (GLCP) 2b. Press [Menu] while the LCP 101, error 413, Numerical Display is powering up. This parameter initializes all except: par Operating Hours par Power-ups par Over Temps par Over Error crosses initialization 3. Release the keys after 5 s 4. The adjustable frequency drive is now programmed according to default settings 7-10 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

68 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive RS-485 Bus Connection One or more adjustable frequency drives can be connected to a controller (or master) using the standard RS-485 interface. Terminal 68 is connected error 413 the P signal (TX+, RX+), while terminal 69 is connected to the N signal (TX- RX-). If more than one adjustable frequency drive is connected to a master, use parallel connections. Figure 7.9: Connection example, error 413. In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the shield, ground the cable screen via terminal 61, which is connected to the frame via an RC link, error 413. Bus termination The RS-485 bus must be terminated by a resistor network at both ends, danfoss aqua drive. If the drive is the first or the last etc/rc.conf 15 syntax error unterminated quoted string in the RS-485 loop, set the switch S801 on the control card to ON. For more information, see the paragraph Switches S201, S202, and S How to Connect a PC to the Adjustable Frequency Drive To control or program the adjustable frequency drive from a PC, install the PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10. The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB cable, or via the RS-485 interface as shown in the Design Guide, chapter How to Install > Installation of misc. connections, danfoss aqua drive. NOTE! The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals. The USB connection is connected to protection ground on the adjustable frequency drive. Use only isolated laptop for PC connection to the USB connector on the adjustable frequency drive. Figure 7.10: For control cable connections, see section on Control Terminals. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-11

69 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive PC Software Tools PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10 All adjustable danfoss aqua drive drives are equipped with a serial communication port. Danfoss provides a PC tool for communication between PC and adjustable frequency drive, PC-based Configuration Tool MCT 10. Please check the section on Available Literature for detailed information on this tool. MCT 10 set-up software MCT 10 has been designed as an easy to use interactive tool for setting parameters in our adjustable frequency drives, error 413. The software can be downloaded from the Danfoss internet site The MCT 10 set-up software will be useful for: Planning a communication network off-line. MCT 10 contains a complete adjustable frequency drive database Commissioning adjustable frequency drives on-line. Saving settings for all adjustable frequency drives. Replacing an adjustable frequency drive in a network. Simple and accurate documentation danfoss aqua drive adjustable frequency drive settings after commissioning. Expanding an existing network. Adjustable frequency drives developed in the future will be fully supported. 7 MCT 10 set-up software supports Profibus DP-V1 via a master class 2 connection. This makes it possible to access on-line read/write error 413 in an adjustable frequency danfoss aqua drive via the Profibus network, danfoss aqua drive. This will eliminate the need for an extra communication network, danfoss aqua drive. Save adjustable frequency drive settings: 1. Connect a PC to the unit via the USB COM port. (Note: Use a PC that is isolated from the line power, in conjunction with the USB port, error 413. Failure to do so may damage equipment.) 2, error 413. Open MCT 10 Set-up Software 3. Choose Read from drive 4, error 413. Choose Save as All parameters are now stored on the PC. Load adjustable frequency drive settings: 1. Connect a PC to the adjustable frequency drive via the USB com port 2, error 413. Open MCT 10 Set-up software 3. Choose Open stored files will be shown. 4. Open the appropriate file 5, danfoss aqua drive. Choose Write to drive All parameter settings are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive. Error 413 separate manual for MCT 10 Set-up Software is available: MG.10.Rx.yy MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

70 VLT AQUA Drive 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive The MCT 10 Set-up software modules The following modules are included in the software package: MCT Set-up 10 Software Setting parameters Copy to and from adjustable frequency drives Documentation and print-out of parameter settings incl. diagrams Ext. user interface Preventive Maintenance Schedule Clock settings Error 413 Action Programming Smart Logic Controller Set-up Ordering number: Please order the CD containing MCT 10 Set-up software using code number 130B1000. MCT 10 can also be downloaded from the Danfoss Internet: Business Area: Motion Controls. 7 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7-13

71 7 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

72 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive danfoss aqua drive How to Program Parameter Set-up Overview of parameter groups Group Title Function 0- Error 413 Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the adjustable frequency drive, function of the LCP buttons and configuration of the LCP display, error 413. 1- Load/Motor Parameter group for motor settings. 2- Brakes Parameter group for setting brake features in the adjustable frequency drive. 3- Reference / Ramps Parameters for reference handling, defining limitations, and configuring the reaction of the adjustable frequency drive to changes. 4- Limits / Warnings Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings. 5- Digital In/Out Parameter group for configuring the digital inputs and outputs. 6- Analog In/Out Parameter group for configuring the analog inputs and outputs. 8- Communication and Options Parameter group for error 413 communications and options. 9- Profibus Parameter group for Profibus-specific parameters. 10- DeviceNet Serial Communication Bus Parameter group for DeviceNet-specific parameters, danfoss aqua drive. 13- Smart Logic Parameter group for Smart Logic Control 14- Special Functions Parameter group for configuring special adjustable frequency drive functions. 15- Drive Information Parameter group containing adjustable frequency drive information such as operating data, hardware configuration and software versions, error 413. 16- Data Readouts Parameter group for data readouts, such as current references, voltages, control, alarm, warning and status words. 18- Info and Readouts This parameter group contains the last 10 Preventive Maintenance logs, danfoss aqua drive. 20- Drive Closed-loop This parameter group is used for configuring the closed-loop PID controller that controls the output frequency of the unit. 21- Extended Closed-loop Parameters for configuring the three extended closed-loop PID controllers. 22- Application Functions These parameters monitor water applications. 23- Time-based Functions These parameters are for actions to be performed on a daily or weekly basis, such as different references for working hours/non-working hours, error 413. 25- Basic Cascade Controller Functions Parameters for configuring the basic cascade controller for sequence control of multiple pumps. 26- Analog I/0 Option MCB 109 Parameters for configuring the Analog Danfoss aqua drive Option MCB Extended Cascade Control Parameters for configuring the extended cascade control. 29- Water Application Functions Parameters for setting water specific functions. 31- Bypass Option Parameters for configuring the bypass option 8 Table 8.1: Parameter Groups Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the Graphic LCP or Numeric LCP in the display area (See Section 5 for details.) Access the parameters by pressing the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key on the control panel. The quick menu is used primarily for commissioning the unit at startup by danfoss aqua drive those parameters necessary to start operation. The main menu provides access to all the parameters for detailed application programming. All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default functions suitable for the majority of water applications but if other special functions are required, they must be programmed in parameter group 5 or 6. MG.20.M Danfoss aqua drive is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-1

73 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Q1 My Personal Menu Parameters defined by the user can be stored in Q1 My Personal Menu. Select My Personal Danfoss aqua drive to display only the error 413, which have been pre-selected and programmed as personal parameters. For example, a pump or equipment OEM may have pre-programmed these to be in My Personal Menu during factory commissioning to make on-site commissioning / fine tuning simpler. These parameters are selected in par My Personal Menu. Up to 20 different parameters can be defined in this menu Setpoint PID Proportional Gain Q1 My Personal Menu PID Integral Time Q2 Quick Set-up The parameters in Q2 Quick Set-up are the basic parameters which are always needed to set up the adjustable frequency drive for operation, danfoss aqua drive. 8 Q2 Quick Set-up Parameter number and name Unit 0-01 Language 1-20 Motor Power kw 1-22 Motor Voltage V 1-23 Motor Frequency Hz 1-24 Motor Current A 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed RPM 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time s 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time s 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit RPM 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit RPM 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 8-2 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

74 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Q3 Function Set-ups The function set-up provides quick and danfoss aqua drive access to all parameters required for the majority of water and wastewater applications including variable torque, constant torque, pumps, dosing pumps, well pumps, booster pumps, mixer pumps, aeration blowers and other pump and fan applications. Among other features, it also includes parameters for selecting which variables to display on the LCP, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog references, closedloop single zone and multi-zone applications error 413 specific functions related to water and wastewater applications, error 413. How to access the Function Set-up - example: 130BT Danfoss aqua drive Figure 8.1: Step 1: Turn on the adjustable frequency drive (On LED lights) Figure 8.5: Step 5: Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll down to, e.g., Analog Outputs. Press [OK]. 130BT BA Figure 8.2: Step 2: Press the [Quick Menus] button (quick menu choices appear). Figure 8.6: Step 6: Choose parameter 6-50 Terminal 42 Output. Press [OK]. 130BT BA Figure 8.3: Step 3: Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll down to Function Set-ups. Press [OK]. Figure 8.7: Step 7: Use the up/down navigation keys to select between the different choices. Press [OK]. 130BA Figure 8.4: Step 4: Function Set-up choices appear. Choose 03-1 General Settings. Press [OK]. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-3

75 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive The Function Set-up parameters are grouped in the following way: Q3-1 General Settings Q3-10 Clock Settings Q3-11 Display Settings Q3-12 Analog Output Q3-13 Relays 0-70 Set Date and Time 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 6-50 Terminal 42 Output Relay Function Can not resolve hostname error l2 0-71 Date Format 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale Relay Function Relay 0-72 Time Format 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale Option relay Hdd self test error read failure hp Relay 0-74 DST/Summertime 0-23 Error 413 Line 2 Large Option relay Function Relay 0-76 DST/Summertime Start 0-24 Display Line 3 Large Option relay Function Relay 0-77 DST/Summertime End 0-37 Display Text Display Text Display Text 3 Q3-2 Open-loop Settings Q3-20 Digital Reference Q3-21 Analog Reference 3-02 Minimum Reference 3-02 Minimum Reference 3-03 Maximum Reference 3-03 Maximum Reference 3-10 Preset Reference 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref/Feedb. Value 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref/Feedb. Value 8 Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings Q3-30 Feedback Settings Q3-31 PID Settings 1-00 Configuration Mode PID Normal/Inverse Control Reference/Feedb.Unit PID Start Speed [RPM] 3-02 Minimum Reference Setpoint Maximum Reference PID Proportional Gain 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage PID Integral Time 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref/Feedb Value 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref/Feedb Value 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Q5 Changes Made Q5 Changes Made can be used for fault finding, error 413. Select Changes made to get information about: The last 10 changes. Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll between the last 10 changed parameters. The changes made since default setting. Select Loggings to get information about the display line readouts. The information is shown in graphs. Only display parameters selected in par and par can be viewed, danfoss aqua drive. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for later reference. Please notice that the parameters listed in the below tables for Q5 only serve as examples since they will vary depending on the programming of the particular adjustable frequency drive PID Integral Time PID Proportional Gain Q5-1 Last 10 Changes PID Proportional Gain PID Integral Time Q5-2 Since Factory Setting 8-4 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

76 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program error 413 Adjustable Frequency Drive Analog Input 53 Analog Input 54 Q5-3 Input Assignments Q6 Loggings Q6 Loggings can be used for fault finding. Please notice that the danfoss aqua drive listed in the table for Error 413 below only serve as examples since danfoss aqua drive will danfoss aqua drive depending on the programming of the particular adjustable frequency drive. Reference Analog Input 53 Motor Current Frequency Feedback Energy Log Trending Cont Bin Trending Timed Bin Trending Comparison Q6 Loggings Main Menu Mode Both the GLCP and NLCP provide access to the main menu mode. Select main menu mode by pressing the [Main Menu] key. Figure 6.2 shows the resulting read-out, which appears on the display of the GLCP. Lines 2 through 5 on the display show a list of parameter groups which can be chosen by toggling the up and down buttons, danfoss aqua drive. 8 Figure 8.8: Display example. Each parameter has a name and number which remain the same regardless of the programming mode. In main menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates the parameter group number. All parameters can be changed in the main menu, error 413. The configuration of the unit (par Configuration Mode) will determine other parameters available for programming, error 413. For example, selecting Closed-loop enables additional parameters related to closed-loop operation. Option cards added to the unit enable additional parameters associated with the option device. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-5

77 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Parameter Selection In main menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. Select a parameter group using the navigation keys. The following parameter groups are accessible: Group no. Parameter group: 0 Operation/Display 1 Load/Motor 2 Brakes 3 References/Ramps 4 Limits/Warnings 5 Digital In/Out 6 Analog In/Out 8 Comm. and Options 9 Profibus 10 CAN Ser. Com. Bus 11 LonWorks 13 Smart Logic 14 Special Functions 15 Drive Information 16 Data Readouts 18 Data Readouts 2 20 Drive Closed-loop 21 Ext. Closed-loop 22 Application Functions 23 Time-based Functions 24 Fire Mode 25 Cascade Controller 26 Analog I/O Option MCB 109 Table 8.2: Parameter groups. 8 After selecting a parameter group, choose a parameter by means of the navigation keys. The middle section on the GLCP display shows the parameter number and name, as well as the selected parameter value. Figure 8.9: Display example. 8.2 Commonly Used Parameters - Explanations Main Menu The main menu includes all available parameters in the VLT AQUA Drive FC 200 adjustable frequency drive. All parameters are grouped logically with a group name indicating the function of the parameter group. All parameters are listed by name and number in the section Parameter Options in this. All parameters included in the quick menus (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q5 and Q6) can be found in the following. Some of the most commonly used parameters for VLT AQUA Drive applications are also explained in the following section. For a detailed explanation of all parameters, please error 413 to the VLT AQUA Drive Programming Guide MG.20.OX.YY which is available at or by ordering it from the local Danfoss office, danfoss aqua drive. 8-6 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

78 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive ** Operation / Display Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the adjustable frequency drive, function of the LCP buttons and configuration of the LCP display Language Option: Defines the language to be used in the display. The adjustable frequency 3ds max 2009 registration-activation error can be delivered with 4 different language packages. English and German are included in all packages. English cannot be erased or manipulated. 1 Small Option: Error 413 a variable for display in line 1, left position. [0] None No display value selected [37] Display Text 1 Present control word [38] Display Text 2 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. [39] Display Text 3 Enables an individual text string to be written, for error 413 in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss socket error 10049 outlook 8-7

79 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [89] Date and Time Readout Displays the current date and time. [953] Profibus Warning Word Displays Profibus communication warnings. [1005] Readout Transmit Error Counter View the number of CAN control transmission errors since the last power-up. [1006] Readout Receive Error Counter View the number of CAN control receipt errors since the last power-up. [1007] Readout Bus-off Counter View the number of Bus Off events since the last power-up. [1013] Warning Parameter View a DeviceNet-specific warning word. One separate bit is assigned to every warning. [1115] LON Warning Word Shows the LON-specific warnings. [1117] XIF Revision Shows the version of the external interface file of the Neuron C chip on the LON option. [1118] LON Works Revision Shows the software version of the application program of the Neuron C chip on the LON option. [1500] Operating Hours View the number of running hours of the adjustable frequency drive. [1501] Running Hours View the number of running hours of the motor. [1502] kwh Counter View the line power consumption in kwh. [1600] Control Word View the control word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the serial communication port in hex code. [1601] * Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and slow-down) in selected unit. [1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and slow-down) in percent. [1603] Status Word Present status word 8 [1605] Main Actual Value [%] One or more warnings in a Hex code [1609] Custom Readout View the user-defined readouts as defined in par. 0-30, 0-31 and [1610] Power [kw] Actual power error 413 by the motor in kw. [1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the motor in HP. [1612] Motor Voltage Voltage supplied to the motor. [1613] Motor Frequency Motor frequency, danfoss aqua drive, i.e., the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive in Hz. [1614] Motor Current Phase current of the motor measured as effective value. [1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e., danfoss aqua drive, the output frequency from the adjustable frequency drive in percent. [1616] Torque [Nm] Present motor load as a percentage of the rated motor torque. [1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per minute), i.e., the motor shaft speed in closed-loop based on the entered motor nameplate data, danfoss aqua drive, the output frequency and the load on the adjustable frequency drive. [1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, calculated by the ETR function. See also parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature, error 413. [1622] Torque [%] Shows the actual torque produced, in percentage. [1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the adjustable frequency drive. [1632] BrakeEnergy/s Present braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor. Stated as an instantaneous value. [1633] BrakeEnergy/2 min Braking energy transferred to an external danfoss aqua drive resistor. The mean power is calculated continuously for the most recent 120 seconds. [1634] Heatsink Temp, error 413. Present heatsink temperature of the adjustable frequency drive. The cut-out limit is 203 ± 9 F [95 ± 5 C]; cutting back in occurs at 158 ± 9 F [70 ± 5 C], danfoss aqua drive. [1635] Thermal Drive Load Percentage load of the inverters error 413 Inv, danfoss aqua drive. Nom. Current Nominal current of the adjustable frequency drive [1637] Inv. Max, error 413. Current Maximum current of the adjustable frequency drive [1638] SL Control State State of the event executed by the control [1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control danfoss aqua drive. [1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a percentage, danfoss aqua drive, i.e., the sum of analog/pulse/bus. 8-8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

80 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [1652] Feedback [Unit] Signal value in units from the programmed digital input(s). [1653] DigiPot Reference View the contribution of the digital potentiometer to the actual reference Feedback, danfoss aqua drive. [1654] Feedback 1 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 1. See also par. 20-0*. [1655] Feedback danfoss aqua drive [Unit] View the value of Feedback 2. See also par. 20-0*. [1656] Feedback 3 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 3, danfoss aqua drive. See also par. 20-0*. [1658] PID Output [%] Returns the drive closed-loop PID controller output value in percent. [1659] Adjusted Setpoint Displays the actual operating setpoint after it is modified by flow compensation. See parameters 22-8*. [1660] Digital Input Displays the status of the digital inputs. Signal low = 0; Signal high = 1. Regarding order, danfoss aqua drive, see par Bit 0 is at the extreme right. [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting Setting of acmgd.dll arx error terminal 53. Current = 0; Voltage = 1. [1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a reference or protection value. [1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting Setting of input terminal 54, danfoss aqua drive. Current = 0; Voltage = 1. [1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as reference or protection value. [1665] Analog Output 42 [ma] Actual value at output 42 in ma. Use runtime error windows 7 c++ to select the variable to be represented by output 42. [1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value error 413 all digital outputs. [1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 29 as a pulse input. [1668] Freq. Error 413 #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 33 as a pulse input. [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output mode. [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 29 in digital output mode. [1671] Relay Output [bin] View the setting of all relays. 8 [1672] Counter A View the present value of Counter A. [1673] Counter B View the present value of Counter B. [1675] Analog input X30/11 Actual value of the signal on input X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card. Option) [1676] Analog input X30/12 Actual value of the signal on input X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card, danfoss aqua drive. Optional) [1677] Analog output X30/8 [ma] Actual value at output X30/8 (General Purpose I/O Card. Optional) Use Danfoss aqua drive to select the variable to be shown. [1680] Serial com. bus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master. [1682] Serial com. bus REF 1 Main reference value sent with control word via the serial communications network, danfoss aqua drive, e.g., from the BMS, error 413, PLC or other master controller. [1684] Comm. Option STW Extended serial communication option status word. [1685] ADF Port CTW 1 Control word danfoss aqua drive received from the bus master, danfoss aqua drive. [1686] AFD Port REF error 413 Status word (STW) sent to the bus master. [1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for danfoss aqua drive communications) [1691] Alarm Word 2 One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in a Hex error 413 (used for serial communications) [1693] Warning Word 2 One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1694] Ext. Status Word One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1695] Ext. Status Word 2 One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communications) [1696] Maintenance Word The danfoss aqua drive reflect the status for the preventive maintenance events programmed in parameter group 23-1* [1830] Analog Input X42/1 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/1 on the Analog I/O card. [1831] Analog Input X42/3 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/3 on the Analog I/O card, error 413. [1832] Analog Input X42/5 Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/5 on the Analog I/O card. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-9

81 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [1833] Analog Out X42/7 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/7 on the Analog I/O card. [1834] Analog Out X42/9 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/9 on the Analog I/O danfoss aqua drive. [1835] Analog Out X42/11 [V] Shows the value of the signal applied to terminal X42/11 on the Analog I/O card. [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 1 [2137] Ext, error 413. 2 Reference [Unit] The value of the danfoss aqua drive for extended Closed-loop Controller 2 [2138] Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 2 [2139] Ext. 2 Output [%] The error 413 of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 2 error 413 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Could not find object bde error 8712 3 [2158] Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 3 [2159] Ext, error 413. Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 3 [2230] No-Flow Power The calculated No-Flow Error 1045 28000 access denied for user for the actual operating speed [2580] Cascade Status Status for the operation of the cascade controller [2581] Pump Status Status for the operation of each individual pump controlled by the cascade controller [2791] Cascade Reference Reference output for use with follower drives. [2792] % Of Total Capacity Readout parameter to show the system operating point as a % capacity of total system capacity. [2793] Cascade Option Status Readout parameter to show the status of the cascade system Display Line 1.2 Small Option: Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position. [1662] * Error 413 input 53 The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small Display Line 1.3 Small Option: Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. [1614] * Motor Current The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small Display Line 2 Large Option: Select a variable for display in line 2. [1615] * Frequency The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small 0-24 Small town terrors livingston Line 3 Large Option: [1652] * Feedback [Unit] The options are the same as those listed for par Display Line 1.1 Small. Select a variable for display in line MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

82 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 0-37 Display Text 1 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is error 413 to write an individual text string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. If it is to be displayed permanently, danfoss aqua drive Display Text 1 in par Display Line 1.1 Small, par Display Line 1.2 Small, error 413, par Display Line 1.3 Small, error 413, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. Use the and buttons to move the cursor, danfoss aqua drive. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, it can be changed. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Display Text 2 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to write an individual text string for display in the LCP or to be read via serial communication. If to be displayed permanently select Display Text 2 in par Display Line 1.1 Small, par Display Line 1.2 Small, par Display Line 1.3 Small, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the LCP to change a character. Use the and buttons to error 31 feature not found the cursor. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, danfoss aqua drive, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Display Text 3 Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] In this parameter, it is possible to hddguru seek error occurred an individual text string for display in error 413 LCP or to be read via serial communication, error 413. If it is to be displayed permanently, select Display Text 3 in par Display Line 1.1 Small,par Display Line 1.2 Small, danfoss aqua drive, par Display Line 1.3 Small, par Display Line 2 Large or par Display Line 3 Large. Use the or buttons on the 8 LCP to change a character. Use the and danfoss aqua drive to move the cursor, error 413. When a character is highlighted by the cursor, this character can be changed. A character can be inserted by placing the cursor between two characters and pressing or Set Date and Time Range: [ :00] Sets the date and time of the internal clock. The format to be used is set in par and :00 NOTE! :59 * This parameter does not display the actual danfoss aqua drive. This can be read in par The clock will not begin counting until a setting different from default has been made Date Format Option: [0] * YYYY-MM-DD Sets the date format to be used in the LCP, error 413. [1] DD-MM-YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP, error 413. [2] MM/DD/YYYY Sets the date format to be used in the LCP. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark atunes ubuntu error 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 0-72 Time Format Option: Sets the time format danfoss aqua drive be used in the LCP. [0] * 24 h [1] 12 h 0-74 DST/Summertime Option: Choose how Daylight Saving Time/Summertime should be handled. For manual DST/Summertime enter the start date and end date in par DST/Summertime Start and par DST/Summertime End. [0] * OFF [2] Manual 0-76 DST/Summertime Start Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the date and time when summertime/dst starts. The date is programmed in the format selected in par Date Format DST/Summertime End Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets danfoss aqua drive date and time when summertime/dst ends. The date is programmed in the format selected in par Date Format General Settings, 1-0* Define whether the adjustable frequency drive operates in open-loop or closed-loop Configuration Mode Option: [0] * Open-loop Motor speed is determined by applying a speed reference or by setting desired speed when in Hand Mode. Open-loop is also used if the adjustable frequency drive is part of a closed-loop control system based on an external PID controller providing a speed reference signal as output. [3] Closed-loop Motor speed will be determined by a reference from the built-in PID controller varying the motor speed as part of a closed-loop control process (e.g., constant pressure or flow). The PID controller must be configured in par. 20-** or via the function set-ups accessed by pressing error 413 [Quick Menu] button. NOTE! This parameter cannot be changed when the motor is running. NOTE! When set for closed-loop, the commands reversing and start reversing will not error 413 the direction of the motor MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

84 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 1-20 Motor Power [kw] Range: 4.00 kw* [ kw] 1-22 Motor Voltage Range: 400. V* [ V] Enter the nominal motor voltage according to the motor nameplate data. The default value corresponds to the nominal rated output of the unit. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running Motor Frequency Range: 50. Hz* [ Hz] Select the motor frequency value from the motor nameplate data.for 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and par Maximum Reference to the 87 Hz application. NOTE! This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is hidserv.exe has generated errors Motor Current Range: 7.20 A* [ A] Enter the nominal motor current value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for calculating motor torque, motor thermal protection, etc, error 413. 8 NOTE! This parameter cannot be adjusted while lula 3d error model not found motor is running Motor Nominal Speed Range: RPM* [ RPM] Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data. This data is used for calculating automatic motor compensations. NOTE! This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Option: The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automatically optimizing the advanced motor parameters par Stator Resistance (Rs) to par Main Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary. [0] * Off No function MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-13

85 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [1] Enable complete AMA performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main reactance Xh. [2] Enable reduced AMA performs a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs in the system only. Select this option if an LC filter is used between the adjustable frequency drive and the motor. Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the section Automatic Motor Adaptation, error 413. After a normal sequence, the display error 413 read: Press [OK] to finish AMA. After pressing the [OK] key, the adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation. Note: For the best adaptation of the adjustable frequency drive, run AMA on a cold motor AMA cannot be performed while the motor is running, danfoss aqua drive. NOTE! It is important to set motor par. 1-2* Motor Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to 10 min., depending on the motor power rating. NOTE! Avoid generating external torque during AMA 8 NOTE! If one of the settings in par, danfoss aqua drive. 1-2* Motor Data is changed, par Stator Resistance (Rs) to par Motor Poles, the advanced danfoss aqua drive parameters, will return to the default setting. This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. NOTE! Full AMA should be run without filter only while reduced AMA should be run with filter. See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation in the Design Guide * Reference Limits Parameters for setting the reference unit, limits and ranges Minimum Reference Range: Ref- [ par Referen- erencefeed-cefeedbackunit] backunit* Enter the Minimum Reference, error 413. The Minimum Reference is the lowest value obtainable by adding all references together. The Minimum Reference value and unit matches the configuration choice made in par Configuration Mode and par Reference/Feedback Unit, respectively, error 413. NOTE! This parameter is used in open-loop only MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

86 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 3-03 Maximum Reference Range: Ref- [par Referen- erencefeed-cefeedbackunit] backunit* Enter the maximum acceptable value for the remote reference. The Maximum Reference value and unit matches the configuration choice made in par Configuration Mode and par Reference/Feedback Unit, respectively, danfoss aqua drive. NOTE! If operating with par. 1-00, Configuration Mode set for Closed-loop [3], error 413, parMaximum Reference/Feedb, danfoss aqua drive. must be used Preset Reference Array [8] Range: 0.00 %* import error 2291 %] Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time Range: s* [ s] 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time Range: s* [ s] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-15

87 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 3-84 Initial Ramp Time Range: 0 s* [0 60 s] Enter the initial ramp-up time from zero speed to Motor Speed Low Limit, error 413, par or Submersible deep well pumps can be damaged by running below minimum speed, danfoss aqua drive. A fast ramp time below minimum pump speed is recommended, error 413. This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate from zero speed to Motor Speed Low Limit Check Valve Ramp Time Range: 0 s* [0 60 s] In order to protect ball check valves in a stop situation, the check valve ramp can be utilized as a slow ramp rate from par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz], to Check Valve Ramp End Speed, set by the user in par or par Error 413 par is different from 0 seconds, the Check Valve Ramp Time is effectuated and will be used to ramp down the speed from Motor Speed Low Limit to the Check Valve End Speed in par or par Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] Range: 0 [RPM]* [0 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]] Set the speed in [RPM] below Motor Speed Low Limit where the Check Valve is expected to be closed and the Check Valve no longer shall be ssl library error 45 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

88 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 3-87 Check Valve Ramp End Speed [Hz] Range: 0 [Hz]* [0 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]] Set the speed in [Hz] below Motor Speed Low Limit where the Check Valve Ramp will no longer be active Final Ramp Time Range: 0 [s]* [0 60 [s]] Enter the Final Ramp Time to be used when ramping down from Motor Speed Low Limit, par or 4-12, to zero speed. Submersible deep well pumps can be damaged by running below minimum speed. A fast ramp danfoss aqua drive below minimum pump speed is recommended. This parameter may be applied as a fast ramp rate from Motor Speed Low Limit to zero speed ** Limits and Warnings Parameter group for configuring limits and warnings Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to correspond to the manufacturer s recommended minimum motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit must danfoss aqua drive exceed the setting in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] Range: RPM* [par RPM] Enter the maximum limit for motor speed, danfoss aqua drive. The Motor Speed High Limit can be set to correspond to the manufacturer s maximum rated motor. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the setting in par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]. Only par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] will be displayed, depending on other parameters in the main menu, and depending on default settings dependant on global location. MG.20.M VLT is a danfoss aqua drive Danfoss trademark 8-17

89 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive NOTE! Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par Switching Frequency). NOTE! Any changes in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par Warning Speed High to the same value as set in bscmake error bk1506 datei Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ** Digital In/Out Parameter group for configuring the digital error 413 and output Terminal 27 Mode Option: [0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. [1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. 8 Please note that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running * Digital Inputs Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals. The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the adjustable frequency drive. All digital inputs can be set to the following functions: Digital input function Select Terminal No operation [0] All *term 32, 33 Reset [1] All Coast inverse [2] All Coast and prologue error 2 45 61 54 inverse [3] All DC brake inverse [5] All Stop inverse [6] All External interlock [7] All Start [8] All *term 18 Latched start [9] All Reversing [10] All *term 19 Start reversing [11] All Jog [14] All *term 29 Preset reference on [15] All Preset ref bit 0 [16] All Preset ref bit 1 [17] All Preset ref bit 2 [18] All Freeze reference [19] All Freeze output [20] All Speed up [21] All Slow [22] All Set-up select bit 0 [23] All Set-up select bit 1 [24] All Pulse input [32] term 29, 33 Ramp bit 0 [34] All Line failure inverse [36] All Run Permissive [52] Hand start [53] Auto-start [54] DigiPot Increase [55] All DigiPot Decrease [56] All DigiPot Clear [57] All Counter A (up) [60] 29, danfoss aqua drive, MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

90 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33 Reset Counter A [62] All Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33 Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33 Reset Counter B [65] All Sleep Mode [66] Reset Maintenance Word [78] Lead Pump Start [120] Lead Error 413 Alternation [121] Pump 1 Interlock [130] Pump 2 Interlock [131] Pump 3 Error 413 [132] All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB 101. Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter. All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: [0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to terminal. [1] Reset Resets adjustable frequency drive after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset. [2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic 0 => coasting stop, danfoss aqua drive. (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). [3] Coast danfoss aqua drive reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC). Leaves motor in free mode and resets the adjustable frequency drive, danfoss aqua drive. Logic 0 => coasting stop and reset. [5] DC brake inverse Inverted input for DC g3ipl flash error (NC). Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period. See error 413 to par The function is only active when the value in par is different from 0. Logic 0 => DC braking, error 413. 8 [6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected terminal goes from logical level 1 to 0, danfoss aqua drive. The stop is performed according to the selected ramp time (par and par. 3-52). NOTE! When the adjustable frequency drive is at the torque limit and has received a stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the adjustable frequency drive stops, configure a digital output to Torque limit & stop [27] and connect this digital output to a digital input that is configured as coast. [7] External Interlock Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but External Interlock generates the alarm message external fault on the display when the terminal which is programmed for Coast Inverse is logic 0. The alarm message will also be active via digital outputs and relay outputs, if programmed for External Interlock. The alarm can be reset using a digital input or the [RESET] key if the cause for the External Interlock has been removed. A delay can be programmed in parExternal Interlock Time, error 413. After applying a signal to the input, the reaction described above will be delayed with the time set in par [8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0 = stop. (Default Digital input 18) [9] Latched start Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. error 413 ms. Motor stops when Stop inverse is activated [10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to reverse, error 413. The reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation, error 413. It does not activate the start function. Select both directions in par Motor Speed Direction. (Default Digital input 19). [11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire, danfoss aqua drive. Signals on start are not allowed at the same time. [14] Jog Used for activating jog speed, danfoss aqua drive. See par MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-19

91 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive (Default Digital input 29) [15] Preset reference on Used for shifting between external reference and preset reference. It is assumed that External/ preset [1] has been selected in par Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = error 413 of the eight preset references is active. [16] Preset ref bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to the table below. [17] Preset error 413 bit 1 Enables a choice between one error 413 the eight preset references according to the table below. [18] Preset ref error 413 2 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according to the table below. Preset ref. bit Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref Preset ref [19] Freeze ref Freezes actual reference. The frozen danfoss aqua drive is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used, danfoss aqua drive. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par and 3-52) in the range 0 - par Maximum Reference. 8 [20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is now the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used, error 413. If Speed up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par and 3-52) in the range 0 - par Motor Frequency. NOTE! When Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive cannot be stopped via a low start [13] signal. Stop the adjustable frequency drive via a terminal programmed for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and reset, inverse [3]. [21] Speed up For digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiometer). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze output. When Speed up is activated for less than 400 msec., the resulting reference will be increased by 0.1%. If Speed up is activated for more than 400 msec., error 413, the resulting reference will ramp according to Ramp 1 in par [22] Slow Same as Speed up [21]. [23] Set-up select bit 0 Selects one of the four set-ups. Set par Active Set-up to Multi Set-up. [24] Set-up select bit 1 Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23]. (Default Digital input 32) [32] Pulse input Select Pulse input when using a pulse sequence as either reference or feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*. [34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic 0 will select ramp 1 while logic 1 will select ramp 2, danfoss aqua drive. [36] Line failure inverse Activates par Line Failure. Line failure inverse is active in the Logic 0 situation. [52] Run Permissive The input terminal, for which the Run permissive has been programmed must be logic 1 before a start command can be accepted. Run permissive has a logic AND function related to the terminal which is programmed for START [8], Jog [14] or Freeze Output [20], which means that error 413 order to start running the motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Run Permissive is programmed on multiple terminals, Run permissive needs only be logic 1 on one of the terminals for the function to be carried out. The digital output signal for Run Request (Start [8], Jog [14] or Freeze output [20]) programmed in par. 5-3* Digital outputs, or par. 5-4* Relays, will not be affected by Run Permissive. [53] Hand start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into hand mode as if button Hand On on the LCP has been pressed and a normal stop command will be overridden. If disconnecting the signal, the motor will stop. To make any other start commands valid, another digital input must be assigned to Auto-Start and a signal applied to this. The Hand On and Auto On buttons on the LCP has no 8-20 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

92 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive impact. The Off button on the LCP will override Hand Start and Auto-Start. Press either the Hand On or Auto On button to make Hand Start and Auto-Start active again. If no signal on neither Hand Start nor Auto-Start, the motor will stop regardless of any normal Start command applied. If signal applied to both Hand Start and Auto-Start, the function will be Error 413. If pressing the Error 413 button on the LCP, error 413 motor will stop regardless of signals on Hand Start and Auto-Start. [54] Auto-start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into auto mode as if the LCP button Auto On has been pressed. See also Hand Start [53] [55] DigiPot Increase Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the Danfoss aqua drive Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9* [56] DigiPot Decrease Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer function described in parameter group 3-9* [57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer reference described in parameter group 3-9* [60] Counter A (up) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter. [61] Counter A (down) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter. [62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A. [63] Counter B (up) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter. [64] Counter B (down) (Terminal 29 danfoss aqua drive 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter, danfoss aqua drive. [65] Error 413 Counter B Input for reset of counter B. [66] Sleep Mode Forces adjustable frequency drive into sleep mode (see par. 22-4*, Sleep Mode). Reacts on the rising edge of signal applied! [78] Reset Preventive Maintenance Word Resets all data in parPreventive Maintenance Word, error cannot render audio capture stream 0. The below setting options are all related to the cascade controller. Wiring diagrams and settings for parameter, error 413, see group 25-** for more details. 8 [120] Lead Pump Start Starts/stops the lead pump (controlled by the adjustable frequency drive). A start requires that also a Error 413 Start signal has been applied, error 413, e.g., to one of the digital inputs set for Start [8]! [121] Lead Pump Alternation Forces alternation of the lead pump in a cascade controller. Lead Pump Alternation, parmust be set to either At Command [2] or At Staging or At Command [3]. Alternation Error 413, parcan be set to any of the four options. [ ] Pump1 Interlock danfoss aqua drive Pump9 Interlock The function will depend on the setting in parNumber of Pumps. If set to No [0], then Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by relay RELAY1 etc. If set to Yes [1], Pump1 refers to the pump controlled by the adjustable frequency drive only (without any of the built-in relays involved) and Pump2 to the pump controlled by the relay RELAY1. Variable speed pump (lead) cannot be interlocked in the basic cascade controller. See below table: Setting in Par. 5-1* Setting in Par [0] No [1] Yes [130] Pump1 Interlock Controlled by RELAY1 (only if not lead pump) Adjustable frequency drive controlled (cannot be interlocked) [131] Pump2 Interlock Controlled by RELAY2 Controlled by RELAY1 [132] Pump3 Interlock Controlled by RELAY3 Controlled by RELAY2 [133] Danfoss aqua drive Interlock Controlled by RELAY4 Controlled by RELAY3 [134] Pump5 Interlock Controlled by RELAY5 Controlled by RELAY4 [135] Pump6 Interlock Controlled by RELAY6 Controlled by RELAY5 [136] Pump7 Interlock Controlled by RELAY7 Controlled by RELAY6 [137] Pump8 Interlock Controlled by RELAY8 Controlled by RELAY7 [138] Pump9 Interlock Controlled by RELAY9 Controlled by RELAY8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-21

93 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Option: [0] * No Operation Same options and functions as par. 5-1* Digital Inputs Terminal 32 Digital Input Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input, error 413. Option: [0] * No operation 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital W910 configuration error Same options and functions as par, error 413. 5-1* Digital Inputs. Option: [0] * No operation 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output Option: Same options and functions as par. 5-3*, error 413. danfoss aqua drive * No operation 5-40 Function Relay 8 Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], error 413, Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], error 413, Relay 9 [8]) Select options to define the function of the relays, danfoss aqua drive. The selection of each mechanical relay is realized in an array parameter. [0] * No Operation [1] Control Ready [2] Drive Ready [3] Drive Ready/Remote [4] Stand-by/No Warning [5] Running [6] Running/No Warning [8] Run on Ref./No Warning [9] Alarm [10] Alarm or Warning [11] At Torque Limit [12] Out of Current Range [13] Below Current, low [14] Above Current, high [15] Out of Speed Range [16] Below Speed, error 413, low [17] Above Speed, danfoss aqua drive, high [18] Out of Feedb. Range [19] Below Feedback, low [20] Above Feedback, high [21] Thermal Warning 8-22 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

94 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [25] Reverse [26] Bus OK [27] Torque Limit & Stop [28] Brake, No Warning [29] Brake Ready, No Fault [30] Brake Fault (IGBT) [35] External Interlock [36] Control Word Bit 11 [37] Control Word Bit 12 [40] Out of Ref. Range [41] Below Reference, low [42] Above Ref. high [45] Bus ctrl [46] Bus ctrl, 1 if error 413 [47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout [60] Comparator 0 [61] Comparator 1 [62] Comparator 2 [63] Comparator 3 [64] Comparator 4 [65] Comparator 5 8 [70] Logic Rule 0 [71] Logic Rule 1 [72] Logic Rule 2 [73] Logic Rule 3 [74] Logic Rule 4 [75] Logic Rule 5 [80] SL Digital Output A [81] SL Digital Output B [82] SL Digital Output C [83] SL Digital Output D [84] SL Digital Output E [85] SL Digital Output F [160] No Alarm [161] Running Reverse [165] Local Ref. Active [166] Remote Ref. Active [167] Start Cmd. Active [168] Drive in Hand Mode [169] Drive in Auto Mode [180] Clock Fault [181] Prev. Maintenance [190] No-Flow MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-23

95 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [191] Dry Pump [192] End of Curve [193] Sleep Mode [194] Broken Belt [195] Bypass Valve Control [199] Error 413 Filling [211] Cascade Pump1 [212] Cascade Pump2 [213] Cascade Pump3 [223] Alarm, Trip Locked [224] Bypass Mode Active 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ A* [ N/A] Enter the high reference value [RPM] for the motor shaft speed and the high feedback value, see also par Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ** Analog In/Out 8 Parameter group for configuring the analog input and output Live Zero Timeout Time Range: 10 s* [1-99 s] Enter the Live Zero Timeout time period. Live 800b0100 windows update error Error 413 Time is active for analog inputs, i.e., terminal 53 or terminal 54, danfoss aqua drive, used as reference or feedback sources. If the reference signal value associated with the selected current input falls below 50% of the value set in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par Terminal 53 Low Current, par Terminal 54 Low Voltage or par Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period longer than the time set in par Live Zero Timeout Time, the function selected in par Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

96 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Option: Select the timeout function. The function set in par Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54 is below 50% of the value in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage, danfoss aqua drive, par Terminal 53 Low Current, par Terminal error 413 Low Voltage or par Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period defined in par Live Zero Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur simultaneously, danfoss aqua drive, the adjustable frequency error 413 prioritizes the timeout error 413 as follows: 1. par Live Zero Timeout Function 2. par Control Timeout Function The output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive can be: [1] frozen at the present value [2] overruled to stop [3] overruled to jog speed [4] overruled to max. speed [5] overruled to stop with subsequent trip [0] * Off [1] Freeze output [2] Stop [3] Jogging [4] Max. speed [5] Stop and trip Terminal 53 Low Voltage Range: 0.07 V* [ par V] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the low reference/ feedback value set in par Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Terminal 53 High Voltage Range: V* [par V] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the high reference/feedback value set in par Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb, danfoss aqua drive. Value. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-25

97 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/low current set in par Terminal 53 Low Voltage and par Terminal 53 Low Current Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/high current value set in A* par Terminal error 413 High Voltage and par Terminal 53 High Current Terminal 54 Low Voltage Range: 0.07 V* [ par V] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the low reference/ feedback value, set in par Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb, error 413. Value Terminal 54 High Voltage Range: V* [par V] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should correspond to the high reference/feedback value set in par Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/low current value set in par Terminal 54 Low Voltage and par Terminal 54 Low Current Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value Range: N/ A* [ N/A] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/high current value set in par Terminal 54 High Voltage and par Terminal 54 High Current Terminal 42 Output Option: Select the function of Terminal 42 as an analog current output. A motor current of 20 ma corresponds to Imax. [0] * No operation [100] Output frequency : Hz, (0 20 ma) [101] Reference : Minimum reference - Maximum reference, (0 20 ma) [102] Feedback : -200% to +200% of par(0 20 ma) [103] Motor current : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par ), (0 20 ma) [104] Torque rel to limit : 0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16), danfoss aqua drive, (0 20 ma) [105] Torq relate to rated : 0 - Motor rated torque, (0 20 ma) [106] Power : 0 - Motor rated power, danfoss aqua drive, (0 20 ma) [107] * Speed : 0 - Speed High Limit (par and par. 4-14), (0 20 ma) [113] Ext. Closed-loop 1 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) 8-26 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

98 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive [114] Ext. Closed-loop 2 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [115] Ext. Closed-loop 3 : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [130] Output freq. 4-20mA : Hz [131] Reference 4-20mA : Minimum Reference - Maximum Reference [132] Feedback 4-20mA : -200% to +200% of par Maximum Reference/Feedb. [133] Motor cur. 4-20mA : 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par Inv. Max, danfoss aqua drive. Current) [134] Torq.% lim 4-20 ma : 0 - Torque limit (par. 4-16) [135] Torq.% nom 4-20 ma : 0 - Motor rated torque [136] Power 4-20mA danfoss aqua drive 0 - Motor rated power [137] Speed 4-20mA : 0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 and 4-14) [139] Bus ctrl. : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [140] Bus ctrl ma : 0-100% [141] Bus ctrl t.o. : 0 100%, (0 20 ma) [142] Bus ctrl 4-20mA t.o. : 0-100% [143] Ext. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% [144] Danfoss aqua drive. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% [145] Ext. Closed-loop ma : 0-100% 8 NOTE! Values for setting the minimum reference are found in open-loop par Minimum Reference and for closed-loop par Minimum Reference/ Feedb. - values for danfoss aqua drive reference danfoss aqua drive open-loop are found in par Maximum Reference danfoss aqua drive for closed-loop par Maximum Reference/ Feedb Terminal 42 Output Min Scale Range: 0.00 %* [ %] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-27

99 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 6-52 Danfoss aqua drive 42 Output Max Scale Range: %* [ %] EXAMPLE 1: Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = Hz Range needed for output = 0 50 Hz Output signal 0 or 4 ma is needed at 0 Hz (0% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0% Output signal 20 ma is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50% 8 EXAMPLE 2: Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200% Range needed for output= 0 100% Output signal 0 or 4 ma is needed at 0% (50% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 50% Output signal 20 ma is needed at 100% (75% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale configure error kerberos libraries not found. php 75% 8-28 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

100 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive EXAMPLE 3: Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%), 0 10 ma Output signal 0 or error 0x8002802b pc cleaner ma is needed at Min ref - set par Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0% Output signal 10 ma is needed at Max ref (100% of range) - set par Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200% (20 ma / 10 ma x 100%=200%) Drive Closed-loop, danfoss aqua drive, 20-** 8 This parameter group is used for configuring the closed-loop PID controller, which controls the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive Reference/Feedback Unit Option: [0] None [1] * % [5] PPM [10] 1/min [11] RPM [12] Pulse/s [20] l/s [21] l/min [22] l/h [23] m 3 /s [24] m 3 /min [25] m 3 /h [30] kg/s [31] kg/min [32] kg/h [33] t/min [34] t/h [40] m/s [41] m/min [45] m MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-29

101 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [60] C [70] mbar [71] bar [72] Pa [73] kpa [74] m WG [75] mm Hg [80] kw [120] GPM [121] gal/s [122] gal/min [123] gal/h [124] CFM [125] ft 3 /s [126] ft 3 /min [127] ft 3 /h [130] lb/s [131] lb/min 8 [132] lb/h [140] ft/s [141] ft/min [145] ft [160] F [170] psi [171] lb/in 2 [172] in WG [173] ft WG [174] in Hg [180] HP This parameter determines the unit that is used for gta san andreas runtime error hatas setpoint reference and feedback that the PID controller will use for controlling the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive Setpoint 1 Range: Proc- [ Proc- essctrlu- nit* essctrlunit] Setpoint error 413 is used in closed-loop mode to enter a setpoint reference that is used by the adjustable frequency drive s PID controller. See the description of par Feedback Function. NOTE! Setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

102 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive PID Normal/Inverse Control Option: [0] * Normal [1] Inverse Normal [0] causes the adjustable frequency drive s output frequency to decrease when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference, danfoss aqua drive. This is common for pressure-controlled supply fan and pump applications, error 413. Inverse [1] causes the adjustable frequency drive s output frequency to increase when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference PID Start Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] When the adjustable frequency drive is first started, error 413, it initially ramps up to this output speed in open-loop mode, following the active ramp-up time, error 413. When the output speed programmed here is reached, the adjustable frequency drive will automatically switch to closed-loop mode and the Error 413 controller will begin to function. This is useful in applications in which the driven load must first quickly accelerate to a minimum error 017 undefined symbol playerpaintballing when it is started. NOTE! This parameter will only be visible if par Motor Danfoss aqua drive Unit is set to [0], RPM PID Proportional Gain Range: 0.50 N/A* [ N/A] 8 If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in par Maximum Reference/Feedb., the PID controller will try to change the output speed equal to what is set in par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] but in practice of course limited by this setting. The proportional band (error causing output to change from 0 100%) can be calculated by means of the formula: ( 1 Proportional Gain error 413 (Max Reference) NOTE! Always set the desired for par Maximum Reference/Feedb, error 413. before setting the values for the PID controller in par. group danfoss aqua drive PID Integral Time Range: s* [ s] Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from the PID controller as long as there is a deviation between the reference/setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size of the deviation. This ensures that the deviation (error) approaches zero. Quick response on any deviation is obtained when the integral time is set to a low value. Setting it too low, however, may cause the control to become unstable. The value set is the time needed for the integrator to add the same contribution as the proportional part for a certain deviation. If the value is set to 10,000, danfoss aqua drive, the controller will act as a pure proportional controller with a P-band based on the value set in par PID Proportional Gain. When no deviation is present, the output from the proportional controller will be 0. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-31

103 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive ** Miscellaneous This group contains parameters used for monitoring water/wastewater applications Low Power Auto Set-up system error 111 phpmyadmin When set for Enabled, an auto set-up sequence is activated, automatically setting speed to approx. 50% and 85% of rated motor speed (par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM], par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]). At those two speeds, the power consumption is error 134 wow measured and stored. Before enabling Auto Set-up: 1. Close valve(s) in order to create a no-flow condition 2. The adjustable frequency drive must be set for open-loop (par Configuration Mode). Note that it is important also to set par Torque Characteristics. [0] * OFF [1] Enabled NOTE! Auto set-up must be done when the system has reached normal operating temperature! 8 NOTE! It is important that the par Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to the max. operational speed of the motor! It is important to do the auto set-up before configuring the integrated PI controller as settings will be reset when changing from closed to open-loop in par Configuration Mode. NOTE! Carry out the tuning with the same settings in par Torque Characteristics, as for operation after the tuning Low Power Detection Option: [0] * Disabled [1] Enabled If selecting Enabled, the low power detection commissioning must be carried out in order to set the parameters in group 22-3* for proper operation! Low Speed Detection Option: [0] * Disabled [1] Enabled Select Enabled for detecting when the motor operates with a oki b410 error 106 as set in par Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

104 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive No-Flow Function Option: Common actions for Low Power Detection and Low Speed Detection (Individual selections not possible). [0] * OFF [1] Sleep Mode [2] Warning Messages in the Local Control Panel display (if mounted) and/or signal via a relay or a digital output. [3] Alarm The adjustable frequency drive trips and the motor stays stopped until reset No-Flow Delay Range: 10 s* [1-600 s] Set the time. Low Power/Low Speed must remain detected to activate signal for actions. If detection disappears before the timer runs out, the timer will be reset Dry Pump Function Option: Low Power Detection must be Enabled (par Low Power Detection) and commissioned (using either parameter group 22-3*, No Flow Power Tuning, or par Low Power Auto Set-up) in order to use Dry Pump Detection. [0] * OFF [1] Warning Messages in the Local Control Panel display (if mounted) and/or signal via a relay or a digital output. [2] Alarm The adjustable frequency drive trips and the motor stays stopped until i am not a terrorist Dry Pump Delay Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Defines for how long the Dry Pump condition must be active before activating Warning or Alarm No-Flow Power Range: 0.00 kw* [ kw] Readout of calculated no-flow power at actual speed. If power drops to the display value, the adjustable frequency drive will consider the condition as a no-flow danfoss aqua drive Power Correction Factor Range: 100 %* [1-400 %] Make corrections to the calculated power at par No-Flow Power, error 413. If No Flow is detected when it should not be detected, error 413, the setting should be decreased. However, error 413 No Flow is not detected when it should be short jump is out of range error, the setting should be increased to above 100% Low Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Set used speed to the 50% level. This function is used for storing values needed to error 413 No-flow Detection. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-33

105 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Low Speed [Hz] Range: 0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Danfoss aqua drive has been set for Hz (parameter not error 413 if RPM selected). Set used speed to the 50% level. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Low Speed Power [kw] Range: 0 kw* [ kw] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for International (parameter not visible if North America selected). Set power consumption to 50% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Low Speed Power [HP] Range: 0 hp* [ hp] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for North America (parameter not visible if International selected). Set power consumption to 50% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [0 - par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Set used speed for the 85% level, danfoss aqua drive. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed [Hz] Range: 0.0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not visible if RPM selected). Set used speed for the 85% level. The function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed Power [kw] Range: 0 kw* [ kw] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for International (parameter not visible if Error 413 America selected). Set power consumption to 85% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection High Speed Power [HP] Range: 0 hp* [ hp] To be used if par Regional Settings has been set for North America (parameter not visible if International selected). Set power consumption to 85% speed level. This function is used for storing values needed to tune No-flow Detection Minimum Run Time Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for the motor after a start command (digital input or bus) before entering sleep mode MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

106 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Minimum Sleep Time Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in sleep mode. This will override any iddnsresolver query name error conditions Wake-up Speed [RPM] Range: 0 RPM* [par par RPM] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter not visible if Hz selected). Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external controller, error 413. Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be canceled Wake-up Speed [Hz] Range: 0 Hz* [par par Hz] To be used if par Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter not visible if RPM selected), danfoss aqua drive. Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external controller controlling the pressure, danfoss aqua drive. Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be cancelled Wake-up Ref./FB Difference Range: 10%* [0-100%] Only to be used if par. 1-00, Sql server error code 17051 Mode, danfoss aqua drive, is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure. Set the pressure drop allowed as a percentage of the setpoint for the pressure (Pset) before canceling sleep mode, danfoss aqua drive. 8 NOTE! If used in application where the integrated PI controller is set for inverse control in parPID, error 413, Normal/Inverse Control, the value set in par will automatically be added Setpoint Boost Range: 0 %* [ %] Only to bcdw bios error used if par Configuration Mode, is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used, error 413. For example, in systems with constant pressure control, error 413, it is advantageous to increase the system pressure before the motor is stopped. This will extend the time during which the motor is stopped and help to avoid frequent start/stop. Set the desired overpressure/temperature as a percentage of the setpoint for the pressure (Pset)/ temperature before entering sleep mode. If set at 5%, the boost pressure will be Pset*1.05. The negative values can be used, for example, error 413, for cooling tower control, where a negative change is needed Maximum Boost Time Range: 60 s* [0-600 s] Only to be used if par Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure. Set the maximum time for which boost mode will be allowed. If the set time is exceeded, sleep mode will be entered and will not wait for the set boost pressure to be reached. MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-35

107 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT Windows 2003 error code 1307 Drive End of Curve Function Option: [0] * OFF End of Curve monitoring not active, danfoss aqua drive. [1] Warning A warning is issued in the display [W94]. [2] Alarm An alarm is issued and the adjustable frequency drive trips. A message [A94] appears in the display, danfoss aqua drive. NOTE! Automatic restart will reset the alarm and start the system again End of Curve Delay Range: 10 s* [0-600 s] When an end of curve condition is detected, danfoss aqua drive, a timer is activated. When the time set in this parameter expires and the End of Curve condition has been steady in the entire period, danfoss aqua drive, the function set in par End of Curve Function will be activated, danfoss aqua drive. If the condition disappears before the timer expires, the timer will be reset Flow Compensation Option: [0] * Disabled [0] Disabled: Setpoint compensation not active. [1] Enabled [1] Enabled: Setpoint compensation is active. Enabling this parameter allows the Flow Compensated Setpoint operation Square-linear Curve Approximation Range: 100 %* [0-100 %] Example 1: Adjustment of this parameter allows the shape of the control curve to be adjusted. 0 = Linear 100% = Ideal shape (theoretical). NOTE! Please note: Not visible when running in cascade MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

108 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Work Point Calculation Option: Example 1: Speed at System Design Working Point is known: From the data sheet showing characteristics for the ms sql error code 156 equipment at different speeds, simply reading across from the HDESIGN point and the QDESIGN point allows us to find point A, which is the system design working point. The pump characteristics at this point should be identified and the associated speed programmed. Closing the valves and adjusting the speed until HMIN has been achieved allows the speed at the no flow point to be identified. Adjustment of par Square-linear Curve Approximation then allows the shape of the control curve to be adjusted infinitely. Example 2: Speed at System Design Working Point is not known: Where the Speed at System Design Working Point is unknown, another reference point on the control curve needs to be determined by means of the data sheet. By looking at the curve for the rated speed and plotting the design pressure (HDESIGN, Point C), the flow at that pressure QRATED can be determined, error 413. Similarly, by plotting the design flow (QDESIGN, Point D), the pressure HD at that flow can be determined. Knowing these two points on the pump curve, along with HMIN described above, allows the adjustable frequency drive to calculate the reference point B and thus to plot the control curve that will also include the system design working point A. 8 [0] * Disabled Disabled [0]: Work Point Calculation not active. To be used if speed at design point is known (see table above), danfoss aqua drive. [1] Enabled Enabled [1]: Work Point Calculation is active, error 413. Enabling this parameter allows the calculation of the unknown System Design Working Point at 50/60 Hz speed, from the input data set in MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-37

109 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive par Speed at No-Flow [RPM] par Speed at No-Flow [Hz], par Pressure at No- Flow Speed, par Pressure at Rated Speed, par Flow at Design Point and par Flow at Rated Speed Speed at No-Flow [RPM] Range: 300. RPM* [0 - par RPM] Resolution 1 RPM. The speed of the motor at which the flow is zero and the minimum pressure HMIN is achieved should be entered here in RPM, error 413. Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be entered in par Speed at No- Flow [Hz]. If it has been decided to use RPM in par Motor Speed Unit, danfoss aqua drive, then par Speed at Design Point [RPM] should also be used. Closing the valves and reducing the speed until minimum pressure HMIN is achieved will determine this value Speed at No-Flow [Hz] Danfoss aqua drive 50.0 Hz* [0.0 - par Hz] Resolution Hz. The speed of the motor at which flow has effectively stopped and minimum pressure HMIN is achieved should be entered here in Hz, error 413. Alternatively, the speed in RPM can be entered in par Speed at No-Flow [RPM]. If it has been decided to use Hz in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at Design Point [Hz] should also be used. Closing the valves and reducing the speed until minimum pressure HMIN is achieved will determine this value Speed at Design Point [RPM] Range: RPM* [par RPM] Resolution 1 RPM. Only visible when par Work Point Calculation is set to Disable. The speed of the motor at which the system design working point is achieved should be entered here in RPM. Alternatively, the speed in Hz can be entered in par Speed at Design Point [Hz]. If it has been decided to use RPM in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Speed at No-Flow [RPM] should also be used Speed at Design Point [Hz] Range: 50/60.0 Hz* [par par Hz] Resolution Hz. Only visible when par Work Point Calculation is set to Disable. The speed of the motor at which the system design working point is achieved should be entered here in Hz. Alternatively, the speed in RPM can be entered in par Speed at Design Point [RPM]. If it has been decided to use Hz in par Motor Speed Unit, then par Linux rdp internal licensing error at No-Flow [RPM] should also be used Pressure at No-Flow Speed Range: N/A* [ par N/A] Enter the pressure HMIN corresponding to Speed at No Flow in Reference/Feedback Units Pressure at Rated Speed Range: [par N/A] N/A* Enter error 413 value corresponding to the Pressure at Rated Speed, in Reference/Feedback Units. This value can be defined using the pump datasheet MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

110 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Flow at Rated Speed Range: N/A* [ N/A] Enter the value corresponding to Flow at Rated Speed. This value can be defined using the pump datasheet * Timed Actions Use Timed Actions for actions needing to be performed on a daily or weekly basis, e.g., different references for working hours / non-working hours. Up to 10 Timed Actions can be programmed in the adjustable frequency drive. The Timed Action number is selected from the list when entering parameter group 23-0* from the LCP. par ON Time par Occurrence then refer to the selected Timed Action number. Each timed action is divided into an ON time and an OFF time, in which two different actions may be performed. The actions programmed in timed actions are merged with corresponding actions from digital inputs, error 413, control work via bus and Smart Logic Controller, according to error 413 rules set up in 8-5*, digital/bus. NOTE! The clock (parameter group 0-7*) must be correctly programmed for timed actions to function correctly. NOTE! When mounting an Analog I/O MCB109 option card, a battery backup of the date and time is included. 8 NOTE! The PC-based configuration tool MCT 10 includes a special guide for easy programming of timed actions ON Time Array [10] Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the ON time for the timed action. NOTE! The adjustable frequency drive has no backup of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default ( :00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with backup is installed. In par Clock Fault, it is possible to program a warning for cases when the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down ON Action Arra [10] Option: Select the action during ON Time, error 413. See par SL Controller Action for descriptions of the options, error 413. [0] * DISABLED [1] No action MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-39

111 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive [2] Select set-up 1 [3] Select set-up danfoss aqua drive [4] Select set-up 3 [5] Select set-up 4 error 413 Select preset ref 0 [11] Select preset ref 1 [12] Select preset ref 2 [13] Select preset ref danfoss aqua drive [14] Select preset ref 4 [15] Select preset ref 5 [16] Select preset ref 6 [17] Select preset ref 7 [18] Select ramp 1 danfoss aqua drive Select ramp 2 [22] Run [23] Run reverse [24] Stop [26] Dcstop 8 [27] Coast [28] Freeze output [29] Start timer 0 [30] Start timer 1 [31] Start timer 2 [32] Set digital out A low [33] Set digital out B low [34] Set digital out C low [35] Set digital out D low [36] Set digital out E low [37] Set digital out F low [38] Set digital out A high [39] Set digital out B error 413 [40] Set digital out C high [41] Set digital out D high [42] Set digital out E high [43] Set digital out F high [60] Reset Counter A [61] Reset Counter B [70] Start Timer 3 [71] Start Timer 4 [72] Start Timer 5 [73] Start Timer 6 [74] Start Timer MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

112 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive NOTE! For choices [32] - [43], see also par. group 5-3*, danfoss aqua drive, Digital Outputs and 5-4*, error 413, Relays OFF Time Array [10] Range: 0 N/A* [0-0 N/A] Sets the OFF time for the timed action. NOTE! The adjustable frequency drive has no backup of the clock function and the set date/time will reset to default ( :00) after a power-down unless a Real Time Clock module with backup is installed. In par Clock Fault, it is possible to program a warning for cases when the clock has not been set properly, e.g., after a power-down OFF Action Array [10] Option: [0] * DISABLED [1] No action [2] Select set-up 1 [3] Select set-up 2 [4] Select set-up 3 [5] Select set-up 4 [10] Select preset ref 0 [11] Select preset ref 1 [12] Select preset ref file error pioneer deh-p7500mp [13] Select preset ref 3 [14] Select preset ref 4 [15] Select preset ref 5 [16] Select preset ref 6 [17] Select preset ref 7 [18] Select ramp 1 [19] Select ramp 2 [22] Run [23] Run reverse [24] Stop [26] Dcstop [27] Coast [28] Freeze output [29] Start timer 0 [30] Start timer 1 [31] Start timer 2 Select the action during OFF Time. See par SL Controller Action for descriptions of the options, error 413. 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-41

113 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 [32] Set digital out A low [33] Set hp 500 system error out B low [34] Set digital out C low [35] Set digital out D low [36] Set digital out E low [37] Set digital out F low [38] Set digital out A high [39] Set digital out B high [40] Set digital out C high [41] Set digital out D high [42] Set digital out E high [43] Set digital out F high [60] Reset Counter A [61] Reset Counter B [70] Start Timer 3 [71] Start Timer 4 [72] Start Timer 5 [73] Start Timer 6 [74] Start Timer Occurrence Array [10] Option: [0] * All days [1] Working days [2] Non-working days [3] Monday [4] Tuesday [5] Wednesday [6] Thursday [7] Friday [8] Saturday [9] Sunday Select the day(s) to which the timed action applies. Specify working/non-working error 413 in par Working Days, par Additional Working Days and par Additional Non-Working Days Water Application Functions, error 413, 29-** The group contains parameters used for monitoring water/wastewater applications Pipe Fill Enable Option: [0] * Disabled Select Enabled to fill pipes at a user-specified rate. [1] Enabled Select Enabled to fill pipes with a user specified rate MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

114 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Pipe Fill Speed [RPM] Range: Speed Low [Speed Low Limit - Speed High Lim- Limit* it] Pipe Fill Speed [Hz] Range: Motor [Speed Low Limit - Speed High Lim- Speed Low it] Limit* Set the filling speed for filling horizontal pipe systems. The speed can be selected in Hz or RPM depending on the choices made in par / par (RPM) or in par / par (Hz), error 413. Set the filling speed for filling horizontal pipe systems, danfoss aqua drive. The speed can be selected in Hz or RPM depending on the choices danfoss aqua drive in par / par (RPM) or in par / par (Hz) Pipe Fill Time Range: 0 s* [ s] Set the specified time for pipe filling of horizontal pipe systems Pipe Fill Rate Range: units/ s* [ units/s] Specifies the filling rate in units/second using the PI controller. Filling rate units are feedback units/ second. This function is used for filling vertical pipe systems but will be active when the filling time has expired, no matter what, until the pipe fill setpoint set in par is reached Filled Setpoint Range: 0 s* [ ,999 s] Specifies the filled setpoint at which the pipe fill function will be disabled and the PID controller will take control. This function can be used both for horizontal and vertical pipe systems. 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-43

115 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8.3 Parameter Options Default Settings Changes during operation: TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while the adjustable frequency drive is in operation, danfoss aqua drive FALSE means that the adjustable frequency drive must be stopped before a change can be made. 4 set-up: 'All set-up': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, danfoss aqua drive, i. e., one single parameter can have four different data values. 1 set-up : data value will be the same in all set-ups. SR: Size related N/A: No default value available. Conversion index: This number refers danfoss aqua drive a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of an adjustable frequency drive, error 413. Conv. index Conv. factor 1 1/ Data type Description Type 2 Integer 8 Int8 3 Integer 16 Int16 4 Integer 32 Int32 5 Unsigned 8 Uint8 6 Unsigned 16 Uint16 7 Unsigned 32 Uint32 9 Visible String VisStr 33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2 35 Bit sequence of 16 Boolean variables V2 54 Time difference w/o date TimD 8-44 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

116 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Operation/Display 0-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 0-0* Basic Settings 0-01 Language [0] Error 413 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint Local Mode Unit [0] As Motor Speed Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8 0-1* Set-up Operations 0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up Installous api error set-ups TRUE - Uint This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32 0-2* LCP Display 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1601 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 1.2 Small 1662 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 1.3 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Display Line 3 Large 1652 All set-ups TRUE - Uint My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16 0-3* LCP Cust. Readout 0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint Custom Readout Min Danfoss aqua drive ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Custom Readout Max Value CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-38 Display Text 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-39 Display Text 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 0-4* LCP Keypad 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Auto on] Key on Danfoss aqua drive [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 0-5* Copy/Save 0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint Set-up Copy error 413 No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-45

117 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 Type Par, danfoss aqua drive. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 0-6* Password 0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint Access to Personal Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8 0-7* Clock Settings 0-70 Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-71 Date Format [0] YYYY-MM-DD 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Time Format [0] 24 h 1 set-up TRUE - Uint DST/Summertime [0] OFF 1 set-up TRUE - Uint DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-79 Clock Fault null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Error 413 Days null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay 0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25] 8-46 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

118 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Load/Motor 1-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 1-0* General Settings 1-00 Configuration Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint Motor Control Principle null All set-ups FALSE - Uint Torque Characteristics [3] Auto Energy Optim. VT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 1-1* Motor Selection 1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchronous All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 1-2* Motor Data 1-20 Motor Power error 413 ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint Motor Current Error 413 All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint Motor Rotation Check [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 1-3* Addl. Motor Data 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Stator Reactance (Xs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8 1-5* Load-Indep. Setting 1-50 Motor Magnetization error 413 Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16 1-6* Load-Depend, danfoss aqua drive. Settg Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Slip Compensation 0 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Danfoss aqua drive Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Resonance Dampening Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8 1-7* Start Adjustments 1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Start Current 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-47

119 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive 8 Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 1-8* Stop Adjustments 1-80 Function at Stop [0] Danfoss aqua drive All set-ups TRUE - Uint Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Trip Speed Low [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Trip Speed Low [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16 1-9* Motor Temperature 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [4] Error 413 trip 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

120 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Brakes 2-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 2-0* DC Brake 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups Error 413 -1 Uint16 2-1* Brake Energy Funct Brake Function [0] Off All danfoss aqua drive TRUE - Uint Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Brake Power Limit (kw) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint AC Brake Max. Current % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Over-voltage Control [2] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-49

121 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Reference / Ramps 3-** Type Par. No, danfoss aqua drive. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 3-0* Reference Limits 3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 3-1* References 3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Reference 1 Source [1] Analog input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint Reference 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16 3-4* Ramp Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 3-5* Ramp Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32 3-8* Other Ramps 3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Initial Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Check Valve Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Check Valve Ramp End Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Check Valve Ramp End Speed [HZ] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Final Ramp Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16 error 413 Digital Pot. meter 3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Ramp Time 1.00 s All error 413 TRUE -2 Uint Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Minimum Limit 0 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD 8-50 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

122 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Limits / Warnings 4-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 4-1* Motor Limits 4-10 Motor Speed Danfoss aqua drive [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit Pawno error 010 invalid function or declaration set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Torque Limit Generator Mode % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Error 413 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All danfoss aqua drive FALSE danfoss aqua drive Uint16 4-5* Adj. Warnings 4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Warning Scanner error 20 hp 1005 High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Warning Speed High outputspeedhighlimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Warning Reference Low N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Reference High N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Feedback Low ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Warning Feedback High ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Missing Motor Phase Function [2] Trip 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 4-6* Speed Bypass 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Error 413 Bypass Speed to [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up error 413 OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 8-51

123 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive VLT AQUA Drive Digital In/Out 5-** Type Par. No. 01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16 5-5* Pulse Input 5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Pulse Filter Time Constant # ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Pulse Filter Time Constant # ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16 5-6* Pulse Output 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max Freq # Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max Freq # Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Pulse Output Max bad cmos checksum error #X30/ Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32 5-9* Bus Controlled 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint Danfoss aqua drive Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark

124 VLT AQUA Drive 8 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive Analog In/Out 6-** Type Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during operation Conversion index 6-0* Analog I/O Mode 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-1* Analog Input Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 53 High Voltage Error 413 All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 53 Error 413 Current 4.00 ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Error 413 53 High Current ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Error 413 6-2* Analog Input Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 54 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 54 Low Current 4.00 ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 54 High Current ma All set-ups TRUE -5 Int Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-3* Danfoss aqua drive Input X30/ Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/11 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-4* Analog Input X30/ Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/12 High Voltage V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb, danfoss aqua drive. Value N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int Term. X30/12 Error 413 Time Constant s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8 6-5* Analog Output Terminal 42 Output [100] Output freq All set-ups TRUE - Uint Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 42 Output Max Scale % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16 6-6* Analog Output X30/ Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16 8 MG.20.M VLT is a registered Danfoss dd input output error 8-53

125

VLT® 5000/5000 Flux/6000 HVAC/8000 AQUA ., danfoss aqua drive. - Danfoss

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Chapter 1 ■ Introduction ., error 413. 3

About this manual . 3

Assumptions . 3

Background knowledge. 3

Additional literature . 4

Chapter 2 ■ Quick start. 5

Profibus DP . 5

Chapter 3 ■ The PROFIBUS option card . 6

Master-controlled drives . 6

Cable lengths and number of nodes . 6

Physical connection . 7

LEDs . 9

Address switches . 10

Chapter 4 ■ Timing . 12

VLT response time behaviour . 12

Time behaviour during system updates . 12

Chapter 5 ■ PPO description . 13

Communication connections ., error 413. 13

PPO description (overview) . 13

Chapter 6 ■ PCA interface . 14

Chapter 7 ■ Parameters and data type structures . 15

Chapter 8 ■ Spontaneous messages . 17

Chapter 9 ■ SYNC and FREEZE . 17

Chapter 10 ■ Control word/status word . 19

Chapter 11 ■ Bus reference value. 2 4

Chapter 12 ■ Examples . 2 5

Example 1: PCV portion and control word /

reference value . 25

Example 2: Process data from the VLT ., error 413. 27

Example 3: Array treatment . 28

Chapter error 413 ■ GSD file . 2 9

Chapter 14 ■ Parameters . 3 0

Chapter 15 ■ Warning and ubisoft error code 1 messages . 3 8

Warning and alarm messages . 38

Spontaneous messages . 38

Additional display readings . 39

Chapter 16 ■ Parameter list . 4 0

Chapter 17 ■ Appendix . 47

Glossary ., error 413. 47

Abbreviations used. 48

Subject index . 49

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1

Contents


Introduction

■ Introduction

Copyrights, Limitation of Liability and Revision

Rights

This publication contains information proprietary to

Danfoss A/S, danfoss aqua drive. By accepting and using this manual

the user agrees that the information contained

herein will be used solely for operating equipment

of Danfoss A/S or equipment from other vendors

provided that such equipment is intended for

communication with Danfoss equipment over a

INTERBUS serial communication link. This publication

is protected under the Copyright laws of

Denmark and most other countries.

Danfoss A/S does not warrant that a software program

produced according to the guidelines provided

in danfoss aqua drive manual will function properly in every

physical, hardware or software environment.

Although Danfoss A/S has tested and reviewed the

documentation within this manual, Danfoss A/S

makes no warranty or representation, either express

or implied, with respect to this documentation,

including its quality, performance, or fitness

for a particular purpose.

In no event shall Danfoss A/S be liable for direct,

indirect, error 413, special, incidental, or consequential

damages arising out of the use, or the inability to

use information contained in this manual, danfoss aqua drive if

advised of the possibility of such damages. In particular,

Danfoss A/S is not responsible for any

costs including but not limited to those incurred as

a result of lost profits or revenue, error 413, loss or damage

of equipment, danfoss aqua drive, loss of computer programs, loss of

data, the costs to substitute these, or any claims

by third parties.

Danfoss A/S reserves the right to revise this publication

at any time and to make changes in its contents

without prior notice or any obligation to notify

previous users of such revisions or changes.

2

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

NB!

Note regarding Profibus FMS

This manual does not deal with Profibus

FMS, danfoss aqua drive, only with Profibus DP. However, in the event

that the communication is to be built up through

Profibus FMS, you should request the description

MG.10.E3.yy ”Profibus Product Manual“ which also

contains a description of the Profibus FMS functions

of the Profibus option card.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ About this manual

This manual is intended as both an instruction manual

and a reference guide. It only broaches the

basics of the PROFIBUS DP protocol, and only

when it is necessary to provide a sufficient understanding

of the PROFIDRIVE implementation mp fail, error code PROFIBUS profile for variable speed drives

(version 2, PNO) and of the PROFIBUS option card

for the series VLT 5000/VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000

HVAC/VLT 8000AQUA by DANFOSS.

In addition, the manual is intended to serve as a

guidebook for the specification and optimization of

the existing communication system.

It is suggested that readers who are not completely

familiar with PROFIBUS DP or the profile for variable

speed drives review the relevant literature on

these subjects.

Even experienced PROFIBUS programmers should

read the entire manual prior to programming, since

every chapter of the manual contains important

information.

Chapter 2 deals with the quick start of the communication

parameters for the DP communication.

Chapter 3 contains details regarding the

PROFIBUS option card and the establishment of

the physical connection.

Please refer to chapter 4 for information regarding

the time behaviour.

Chapter 5 presents an overview of the PPOs (informative

data telegrams).

The PCA interface as a parameter interface in the

PPO is explained in chapter 6.

Chapter 7 contains the description wintoflash hal dll error the parameter

and data structure.

Chapter 8 contains a description of spontaneous

messages.

The response to the ”Sync” and ”Freeze”

commands is explained in chapter 9.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Chapter 12 contains examples for the use of the

PPOs. It is recommended that readers review the

examples for a better understanding of the PPOs.

Comments regarding the GSD file can be found in

chapter 13.

Chapter 14 contains the VLT parameters specific to

the Profibus.

Warning and alarm messages and display readings

specific to the Profibus are described in chapter

15.

A parameter listing as an overview of all VLT 5000/

VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000HVAC/VLT 8000AQUA

parameters can be found in chapter 16.

In chapter 17 you will find the abbreviations used

in this manual. The manual concludes with a short

glossary and a detailed index for quick navigation.

If you are interested in learning more about the

PROFIBUS protocol in general, we recommend

that you consult the relevant, very comprehensive

literature for this purpose.

■ Assumptions

The manual assumes that you are using a

DANFOSS PROFIBUS option card with field bus,

together with a DANFOSS VLT frequency converter,

that you are using a PLC or a PC with a serial

interface as master which supports all

communication services for PROFIBUS, and that

all requirements are met and all limitations are

observed which arise from the PROFIBUS standard,

the PROFIBUS profile of error 413 speed drives,

and the company-specific implementation of

PROFIDRIVE, or those of the VLT drives.

■ Background knowledge

The DANFOSS PROFIBUS option card is designed

for the communication with all masters that comply

with the PROFIBUS standard. Thus, the assumption

is made that you are familiar with the PC or

PLC to be used as a master on your system, danfoss aqua drive. Any

questions regarding the hardware or software of

other suppliers are beyond the scope of this manual

and outside the responsibility of DANFOSS.

The control word and status word as essential

elements of the PPOs for the operational control, In the event of questions concerning the configura-

as well as the bus reference value are explained in tion of the master-to-master communication or the

chapter 11.

configuration with a slave not manufactured by

DANFOSS, you should refer to the information in

the respective manuals.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 3

Introduction


Quick start

■ Quick start

Details regarding the programming of the usual VLT

parameters may be gathered from the manual for

the VLT 5000/VLT 5000Flux/VLT 6000HVAC/VLT

8000AQUA series.

The communication is established by setting the

parameters indicated below.

Details regarding the adjustment of the master are

provided by the master manual and by those

chapters in this manual that deal with the particulars

of the VLT PROFIBUS interface.

4

The required GSD file is available on the

internet at http://www.danfoss-sc.de.

■ Profibus DP

Parameter 904

This selects the desired informative data telegram

(PPO).

Parameter 918

This sets the address of the VLT station – one

specific address per VLT.

Parameter 801

This determines the transmission speed in bit/s.

The standard setting is 1.5 MBaud.

Parameter 502 = ”BUS“.

As an alternative to the switching of terminal 27, the

parameter 502 may be set to ”BUS“ in the factory

setting before the motor can even be started.

Please note the logic links of the parameters 502-

508 to the clamping functions which are also

active in the Profibus. (See operations manual for

an explanation.)

The VLT must be switched off/on once after

the Profibus parameters have been set.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

When configuring the PPO types, a error 413 made between module consistency and

word consistency:

Module consistency means that a specific portion

of the PPO is defined as a connected module.

The parameter interface (PCV, danfoss aqua drive, length of 8 bytes) of

the PPO always has module consistency.

Word consistency means that a specific portion of

the PPO is divided into individual data sectors of

word length (16 bits).

The process data of the PPO may have either

module consistency or word consistency, as

desired.

Some PLCs, such as Siemens S7, require special

functions to call modules that are longer than 4

bytes (in the case of Siemens: ”SFC”, see master

manual).

This means that the PCV interfaces of the PPOs

can only be called through the SFC functions in

the case of Siemens (S7).

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Master-controlled drives

The PROFIBUS option card allows an enormous

flexibility of the control, diagnosis and parameterization

of variable speed drives. The PROFIBUS

card behaves like a part of the VLT and enables

access to all parameters that are important for the

respective application. The variable speed drive

always acts as slave and is capable of exchanging

a multitude of commands and pieces of information

together with the master. Control signals such

as ”speed reference value”, ”start/stop” of the motor,

”reversion” are transmitted by the master in the

form of telegrams.

The VLT confirms the receipt by transmitting status

signals such as ”operation enabled”, ”reference

value reached”, danfoss aqua drive, ”motor stopped” etc. to the master.

The drive can also report errors and transmit alarm

and warning messages, e.g. ”VLT error” or ”excess

current”.

The PROFIBUS option card transmits signals in

accordance with the PROFIBUS field bus standard,

EN 50170, part 3. It can thus exchange data with all

masters that meet this standard; however, this

does not mean that all services available in the

PROFIBUS standard are supported. The PROFIBUS

profile for variable speed drives (version 2, PNO) is

a part of PROFIBUS which supports only those

services that concern applications with speed

control.

PROFIDRIVE is an implementation of the profile

developed by DANFOSS and several other firms.

Communications partner

The variable speed drive always acts as slave in a

control system and may thus exchange data with

one or more masters, depending on the type of the

application. The master may be a PLC or a PC with

a PROFIBUS communications

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA Danfoss aqua drive Cable lengths and number of nodes

The maximum cable length of a segment depends

on the transmission speed, danfoss aqua drive. The total cable length

includes stub lines, if applicable. A stub line is the

connection from the main bus cable to each node

if a ”T” connection exists instead of a direct connection

of the main bus cable to the nodes; cf. the

stub line length. The following table shows the

maximum permitted cable lengths and the maximum

number of nodes or VLTs with 1, 2, 3 or 4 bus

segments.

Please note that a repeater switched between two

segments represents a node in both segments. The

number of VLTs is based on a system with only one

master. In the case of multiple masters, the number

of VLTs must be reduced accordingly.

The total stub line length of a segment is limited as

follows:

Stub line length

Transmission Max. stub line length

speed per segment

[m]

9,6-93,75 kBaud 96

187,5 kBaud 75

500 kBaud 30

1,5 MBaud 10

3-12 MBaud none

Maximum total bus cable length

1 segment: 2 segments: 3 segments: 4 segments:

32 nodes 64 nodes 96 nodes 128 nodes

Transmission (31 VLTs) (1 repeater, 61 VLTs) (2 repeater, 91 VLTs) (3 repeater, danfoss aqua drive, 121 VLTs)

speed [m] [m] [m] [m]

9,6-187,5 kBaud 1000 2000 3000 4000

500 kBaud 400 800 1200 1600

1,5 MBaud 200 400 600 800

3-12 MBaud 100 200 300 400

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 5

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

The indicated lengths in the tables are valid on the

condition that bus cables with the following properties

are used:

– Impedance: 135 to 165 Ohm at a measuring

frequency of 3 to 20 MHz

– Resistance: < 110 Ohm/km

– Capacity: < 30 pF/m

– Damping: max. 9 dB across the entire cable

length

– Cross-section: max. 0,34 mm pursuant to

AWG 22

– Wire check nvram error twisted pair, 1 x 2 or 2 x 2 or 1 x 4

conductors

– Shielding: copper-braided or braided and

foil laminated

■ Physical connection

The PROFIBUS option error 413 will be connected to

the bus line (data line) at terminals 62 and 63.

Data line ”B” (TxD/RxD-P) will be connected to

terminal 62 and data line ”A” (TxD/RxD-N) to terminal

63. A master with a voltaically insulated bus

driver and overvoltage protection (e.g. Z diode) is

recommended.

Protective measures for EMC

It is recommended to carry out the following protective

measures for EMC in order to ensure a

trouble-free operation of the PROFIBUS network.

Additional notes concerning the subject of EMC

can be found in the project manual for the

VLT5000 series (MG.50.Cx.yy) and in the manual for

the Profibus master.

6

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

It is recommended to use the same cable type

throughout the entire network in order to avoid

mismatches of the impedance.

The figures in the following description indicate the

maximum permitted number of stations in each

segment. These figures do not refer to the station

addresses, since each station in the network must

have an unambiguous address.

Segment 1

Segment 2

Segment 3

Segment 4

The applicable national and local regulations,

for example with respect to protective

earthing, must be observed.

Cable setup

The PROFIBUS communications cable must be

kept at a distance from the motor and braking

resistance cables in order to avoid high-frequency

line failures from one cable to another. As a rule, a

distance of 200 mm is sufficient. In general, it is a

good idea to keep the greatest possible distance

between the cables, especially if they run parallel

for an extended distance.

If the PROFIBUS cable has to cross a motor and

braking resistance cable, it should occur at a

90 degree angle.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Connection of the cable screening

The shielding of the PROFIBUS cable always needs

to be of a large-area, low-impedance type on both

sides. As a matter of principle, the screen should be

put up with a large area and low impedance at all

PROFIBUS stations. It is very important to have an

earth connection with low impedance even at high

frequencies, danfoss aqua drive. This can be achieved by connecting

the shield surface to earth, error 413, for example with the

help of a cable bow or a conductive cable

connector.

The VLT is equipped with various terminals and

supports in order to provide a flawless shielding of

the PROFIBUS cable. The shield connection error 413 in the following diagram.

Diagram, bus connection

VLT danfoss aqua drive 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

4

Earthing

It is important to connect all stations linked to the

PROFIBUS network to the same error 413 potential.

The earthing must have a low high-frequency impedance.

This can be achieved by connecting a

protective housing surface which is runtime error at cannot import large as

possible to earth, for example by mounting the VLT

to a conductive rear wall.

Especially in the case of large distances between

the loi syntax error trong pascal of a PROFIBUS error 413, the additional

use of potential equalization cables to connect

the individual stations to the same earth potential

may be necessary.

Bus connection

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 7

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

It is important to terminate the bus line correctly.

Mismatches of the impedance may lead to reflections

in the line and cause incorrect transmissions.

Error 413 PROFIBUS option card is equipped with a

suitable termination which can be danfoss aqua drive by

the switches 1 and 2 at the switch block S1

directly to the right above the terminal block

MK danfoss aqua drive. The bus termination is active when the

switch is in the ”ON” position.

8

The switches must never be set in opposite

directions. Both switches must be set

to ON or OFF.

– Most masters and repeaters are equipped with

their own termination.

Error code 0x80fe0000 windows 7 an internal termination circuit in the danfoss aqua drive of

three resistors is connected to the bus line, a

5 V direct voltage must be used. Danfoss aqua drive make sure that it is voltaically separated

from the power supply cable.

The PROFIBUS option card

VLT ® danfoss aqua drive PROFIBUS

■ LEDs

There are four LEDs on the PROFIBUS option

card:

LD1 and LD4: Flickering (very rapid blinking),

when data are being exchanged

through the option card.

Comment: with danfoss aqua drive ”flicker” of

the LEDs, the VLT is receiving a

telegram.

LD2 and LD3: Shining, when the option card is

initialized and ready for the data

exchange, or when data are already

being exchanged.

Blinking, when the function for the

automatic baud rate determination

attempts to determine the

current baud rate.

Note: a faulty connection of the

data line may also cause blinking

of the LEDs. (see “Physical connection”).

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Address switches

The station address can be set in parameter 918 or

through a hardware switch (S2, 1-4 and S3, 5-7 on

the PROFIBUS option card).

The setting of an address through parameter 918 is

only possible when the address switches are set to

0 or > 126.

Each slave must have an unambiguous address.

The address is the binary value set for the

switches, cf. the table below. The modification error 413 address switches occurs during the next turnon

procedure.

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 1 0 error 413 0 0

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

6 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

7 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

8 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

9 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

10 0 1 0 1 0 0 error 413 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

12 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

13 1 0 1 1 0 0 0

14 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

15 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

16 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

17 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

18 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

19 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

20 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

21 1 0 1 error 413 1 0 0

22 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

23 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

24 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

25 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

26 0 1 0 1 1 mbr error 3 windows 7 0

27 1 1 0 1 1 0 0

28 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

29 1 0 1 1 1 0 0

30 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

31 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

32 0 0 0 0 0 danfoss aqua drive 0

33 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

34 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

35 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

36 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

37 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

38 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

39 1 1 1 0 0 1 0

40 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

41 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

42 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

43 1 1 0 1 0 1 error 413 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

45 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

46 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

47 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

48 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

49 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

50 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

51 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

52 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

53 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

54 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

55 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

56 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

57 1 0 0 1 1 1 0

58 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

59 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

60 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

61 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

62 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

63 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

64 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

65 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 9

The PROFIBUS option card


The PROFIBUS option card

10

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position danfoss aqua drive = ON, 0 = OFF)

66 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

67 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

68 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

69 1 0 1 0 0 0 1

70 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

71 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

72 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

73 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

74 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

75 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

76 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

77 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

78 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

79 1 internal error 2753 1 1 0 0 1

80 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

81 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

82 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

83 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

84 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

85 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

86 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

87 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

88 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

89 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

90 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

91 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

92 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

93 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

94 0 1 1 1 1 0 1

95 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

96 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

97 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

98 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

100 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

101 1 0 1 0 0 1 1

102 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

103 windows ipv6 error 1 1 0 0 1 1

104 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

105 1 0 error 413 1 0 1 1

106 0 1 0 1 i2cp error listening to port 7654 1 1

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Switches 1-7 (switch 8 is not used)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Address switch position (1 = ON, 0 = OFF)

107 1 1 0 error 413 0 1 1

108 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

109 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

110 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

111 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

112 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

113 1 0 0 0 1 1 1

114 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

115 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

116 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

117 1 0 1 danfoss aqua drive 1 1 1

118 0 1 1 0 1 1 1

119 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

120 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

121 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

122 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

123 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

124 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

125 1 0 1 1 error in preliminary mft reading 1 1

126 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

127 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Timing

■ VLT response time behaviour

The period for the update through the PROFIBUS

connection can be subdivided into two portions:

1) The communication period, i.e. the time required

to transmit data from the master to the slave

(VLT with PROFIBUS option), danfoss aqua drive, and

2) the internal update period, danfoss aqua drive, i.e. the time required

to transmit data between the VLT control card

and the PROFIBUS error 413 card.

The communication period (tcom) depends on the

respective transmission speed (baud rate) and the

type of master being used. The shortest achievable

communication period is approximately 30 μsec

per slave with the VLT PROFIBUS option when DP

communication with a data quantity of 4 bytes (PPO

type 3) at 12 Mbaud is used. The communication

period increases with more data or lower

transmission speeds.

The internal update period (t int) depends on the

respective data as there are different channels for

the transmission of data, with time-critical data,

such as the control word, being given the highest

priority. The internal update time for the respective

data types is listed below.

Update

Data system error 1326, tint

Control word/main reference value

(Part of PPO) 2 msec.

Status word/respective output frequency

(Part of PPO) 2 msec.

Read parameter through PCD portion of PPO

Write parameter through PCD portion of PPO

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Time behaviour during system update

The system update period is the time required to

update all slaves of the network when cyclical

communication is used.

The update time of a single slave is composed of

both the communication period (depending on the

baud rate) and the station delay (TSDR) in the

slave, and of the delay in the master associated

with the station.

The station delay (TSDR) is the delay time from the

moment when a station receives the last bit of a

telegram to the moment when it sends the first bit

of the next telegram. The station delay is defined

by two parameters: the minimum station delay

(TSDRmin) and the maximum station delay (TSDRmax).

Current station delay for the VLT PROFIBUS option:

– DP: 11 bit times

Current master station delay:

– This information must be provided by the manufacturer

of the respective PROFIBUS master.

Example

– DP master with 1.5 MBaud and PPO type 3

(4 byte data); the assumption here is for 50 bit

times as master TSDR.

Time [msec] Action

0 Master starts data transmission

Last bit received in slave

Slave station delay

Slave starts data transmission

Last bit received in master

Master station delay

(50 bit times » 0.033)

Master ready for data transmission

to next slave

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 11

Timing


PPO description

■ PPO description

■ Communication connections

Communication pursuant to PROFIBUS DP, i.e.

EN50170 part 3, is supported when DP is selected

in parameter 800.

Accordingly, a master must be used that supports

PROFIBUS DP.

One of the PPOs described below must be used in

the case of DP communication.

■ PPO description (Overview)

A feature of the PROFIBUS profile for variable

speed drives is a communications object designated

as ”PPO”, danfoss aqua drive, i.e. ”parameter process data object”.

All cyclical informative data are transmitted via

PPOs. Thus, danfoss aqua drive, PPOs form the framework for the data

traffic.

The selection of the PPO type takes place in

parameter 904.

A PPO may consist of a parameter portion and a

process data portion. The parameter portion may

be used for reading and/or updating of parameters

(successively).

The process data portion consists danfoss aqua drive a fixed part

(4 bytes) and a parameterizable part (8 or 16 bytes).

The control word and speed reference value

are transmitted to the VLT in the fixed portion,

whereas the status word and current output frequency

are transmitted by the VLT. In the parameterizable

portion, the user selects which parameters

are to be transmitted to the VLT (parameter

915) and error 413 are to be transmitted by the VLT

(parameter 916).

Type 1, 2 and 5 consist of the parameter portion

and 4, 12 and 20 bytes of process data respectively.

Type 3 and 4 consist of 4 and 12 bytes of process

data respectively.

12

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

PPO, Parameter Process Data Object

PCD Process Data

PCV Parameter Characteristics Value

PCA Parameter Characteristics (bytes 1, 2);

PCA processing see next chapter.

IND Subindex (byte 3), (byte 4 is not used)

PVA Parameter Value (bytes 5 to 8)

CTW Control Word

STW Status Word

MRV Main Reference Value

MAV Main Actual Value

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ PCA processing

The master controls and monitors VLT parameters

through the Danfoss aqua drive portion of the PPOs type 1, 2 and

5 and requests a response from the VLT (slave). In

addition to the parameter processing, the VLT can

also transmit a spontaneous message.

Requests and responses involve an acknowledgement

exchange (a so-called handshake) which

cannot be worked off in stack operation. This

means that the master, when sending a read/write

request, must wait for the response before sending

a new request, error 413. A request or response is limited to

a maximum of 4 bytes, i.e. no text strings can be

transmitted.

PCA - Parameter description

15 14 unmatched data error volume limit 83 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RC MSP PNU

RC: Request/Response Characteristics (Sector: 0-15)

SPM: Toggle bit for spontaneous messages

PNU: Parameter Number (Sector: 1-990)

Request and response

In the RC portion of the PCA word the requests of

the master to the slave are triggered. The other two

PCV fields IND and PVA must be evaluated as

well.

The PVA portion transmits parameter values in

word size with the bytes 7 and 8; double words

require the bytes 5-8, i.e. 32 bits.

If the request or response contains array elements,

the array subindex will be in IND (byte 3). In the

event of a parameter description, IND contains the

record subindex.

RC content

Request Function

0 No request

1 Request parameter value

2 Change parameter value (word)

3 Change parameter value (double word)

4 Request description element

5 Change description element

6 Request parameter value (array)

7 Change parameter value (array word)

8 Change parameter value (array

double word)

9 Request number of array elements

10-15 Not assigned

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Response Function

0 No response

1 Transmit parameter value (word)

2 Transmit parameter value (double

word)

3 Transmit description element

4 Transmit parameter value (array word)

5 Transmit parameter value

(array double word)

6 Transmit number of array elements

7 Request not executable (with error

number, see below)

8 No operating authority for PCV interface

9 Spontaneous message (word)

10 Spontaneous message (double word)

11 Spontaneous message (array word)

12 Spontaneous message (array double

word)

13-15 Not assigned

If a request from the master is not executed by the

slave, the RC word in the PPO-Read has the

value 7. The error number is in bytes 7 and 8 of the

PVA element.

Error no. Meaning

0 Improper PNU

1 Parameter value error 413 changeable

2 Upper or lower value passed

3 Faulty subindex

4 No array

5 Wrong data type

6 Setting not permitted (resettable only)

7 Description element not changeable

8 No PPO-Write for IR

9 Description data not available

10 Access group

11 No parameter operating authority

12 Keyword missing

13 Text not readable in cyclical traffic

14 Name not readable in cyclical traffic

15 Text array not available

16 PPO-Write missing

17 Request temporarily unexecutable

18 Other error

19 Data not readable in cyclical traffic

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered application load error 5 0000065434 metro 2033 trademark 13

PCA interface


Parameters and data type structures

■ Parameters and data type structures

Parameter description

Parameters which are accessible through the parameter

number (PNU) have additional attributes

that are a component of the accompanying descriptive

element.

Writing/reading of a parameter description occurs

through the PCV portion by means of the RC

commands error 413 and the subindex of the desired

descriptive element (see accompanying diagram).

Characteristics

The “characteristics” subindex extends the definition

of the parameter description, danfoss aqua drive. The individual

bits 9 to 15 have the values TRUE [1] or FALSE [0]

(see table danfoss aqua drive Meaning

15 Active parameter

14 Array

13 Parameter value resettable only

12 Factory setting of parameter changed

11 Text available

10 Additional text array available

9 No write access (read only)

8 Lower and upper limit. Standardization

and size attribute not relevant.

0-7 Data type of the parameter corresponds

to OD

The low byte (bit 0-7) indicates the data type of

the parameter (see following table).

The ”data type” for each parameter can be

found in the corresponding column in the

chapter parameter listing.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Caracteristics

"Sub index" 1

Element size

"Sub index" 2

Size attribute

"Sub index" 4

Lower limit

"Sub index" 7

Upper limit

"Sub index" 8

Extended features

"Sub index" 10

Data types supported by VLT

Data Object Short Description

type form

3 5 12 Integer 16

4 5 12 Integer 32

5 5 Unsigned 8

6 5 O2 Unsigned 16

7 5 O4 Unsigned 32

9 5 Visible string

10 5 Byte string

13 5 Time difference 1)

33 5 N2 Standardized value

(16 bit) 1)

35 5 V2 Bit sequence

1) See following page for service call 231 fatal error Data type 5 = Unsigned 8

Size attribute

The size attribute is 2 bytes long.

Byte 1 incorporates the physical unit of measurement

(size index), byte 2 the conversion index.

The ”conversion index” for each parameter

can be found in the corresponding column

in the chapter parameter listing.

The ”conversion index” produces the conversion

factor for each parameter.

Example:

Parameter 205: Conversion index = -3 (10E-3)

Conversion factor: 0.001

15200 = 15.200 Hz

An excerpt from the Error 413 profile with

respect to the assignment of the size index and

the conversion index to the physical size can be

found on the following page.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Time difference (to table ”Objects and data types

supported by the VLT”)

The data type time difference is a measure of time

in milliseconds.

Notation: Time difference

Value range: 0 ≤ i ≤ (2 32 -1) milliseconds [ms]

Coding: The time is represented as a binary

32 bit value (4 bytes). The first

4 (MSB) bits are always zero (see

table below).

Data coding of the data type time difference

Bit Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1

8 0 ms 2 23 ms 2 15 ms 2 7 ms

7 0 ms 2 22 ms 2 14 ms 2 6 ms

6 0 ms 2 21 ms 2 13 ms 2 5 ms

5 0 ms 2 20 ms 2 12 ms 2 4 ms

4 2 27 ms 2 19 ms error 413 11 ms 2 3 ms

3 2 26 ms 2 18 ms 2 10 ms 2 2 ms

2 2 25 ms 2 17 ms 2 9 ms 2 1 ms

1 2 24 ms 2 16 ms 2 8 ms 2 0 ms

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Standardized value

A linear value

0% = 0 (0h), 100% are 2 14 (4000h)

Data type N 2

Range -200% . 200% – 2 –14

Resolution 2 –14 = 0,0061%

Length 2 bytes

Note: Two’s complement notation

MSB is the first bit after the sign bit of the first

byte.

Sign bit = 0 = positive number

Sign bit = 1 = negative number

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Byte 2 SIGN 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8

Byte 1 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0

Physical Size Unit of Abbreviation Conversion Conversion

size index measurement index factor

0 No dimension 0 1

Second s 0 1

-1 0,1

-2 0,01

Time 4 Millisecond ms -3 0,001

Minute min 70 60

Hour h 74 3600

Day d 77 86400

Watt-hour Wh 0 1

Energy 8 Kilowatt-hour kWh 3 1000

Megawatt-hour MWh 6 106 Milliwatt mW -3 0,001

Power Watt W 0 1

9 Kilowatt kW 3 1000

Megawatt MW 6 10 6

Rotation 11 Revolutions per minute RPM 0 1

Torque 16 Newtonmeter Nm 0 1

Kilonewtonmeter kNm 3 1000

Temperature 17 Degree Celsius °C 0 1

Millivolt mV -3 0,001

Voltage 21 Volt V 0 1

Kilovolt kV 3 1000

Milliampere mA -3 0,001

Current 22 Ampere A 0 1

Kiloampere kA 3 1000

Milliohm mOhm -3 0,001

Resistance 23 Ohm Ohm 0 1

Kiloohm kOhm 3 1000

Relation 24 Percent % 0 1

Relative change 27 Percent % 0 1

Hertz Hz 0 1

Frequency 28 Kilohertz kHz 3 1000

Megahertz MHz 6 106 MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered error 413 trademark 15

Parameters and data type structures


Spontaneous messages

■ Spontaneous messages

The spontaneous message is triggered by the

active parameters 538, 540 or 953.

The PCV response indicates the parameter number

(PNU) and the parameter value (PVA) of the modified

active parameter that triggered the message.

Spontaneous messages are generated when active

parameters are changed, i.e. a message occurs

when a warning appears and when a warning disappears.

At the same time, the VLT modifies the SPM bit (11)

of the PCV word (see ”PCA processing”).

The spontaneous messages are transmitted until

the master has confirmed the receipt of the message

and changed the SPM bit.

Spontaneous messages are only activated

when danfoss aqua drive parameter 917 is in the ”ON”

position.

In the event of an activated spontaneous message,

the parameter channel is blocked until the spontaneous

message has been acknowledged by the

master.

16

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Example of a spontaneous message

Observation of the parameter channel (PCV) from the PPO (without index field):

PCV (Hex) PVA (Hex) from from Description

Master VLT

12 08 00 00 00 00 x the master requests the current of the VLT

12 08 00 00 00 F0 x VLT current value: 2.4 Amp (parameter 520)

12 08 00 danfoss aqua drive 00 00 x the master requests the current of the VLT

AC 1A 00 00 00 0A x VLT has a spontaneous message, runtime error 216 at 004041b2 autodata spontaneous message

bit is set, the PNU 538 (alarm word) has the value 000A error 413 08 00 00 00 error 413 x the master requests the current of the VLT and acknowledges

the spontaneous message by ”toggling” the SPM in the PCV

1C 08 00 00 00 F0 x VLT current value: 2.4 Amp, the spontaneous message bit

remains at ”1” until the next spontaneous message; the

spontaneous message is acknowledged.

The VLT saves up to 16 consecutively transmitted

SPMs in a FIFO buffer. If only one SPM is in the

FIFO buffer, the VLT immediately resumes normal

operations after the master has acknowledged it

(and the cause of the SPM has been eliminated). If

there is more than one SPM in the FIFO buffer, the

transmission takes place one after the other following

the acknowledgement. Additional SPMs that

are generated while the buffer is full will be

ignored.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ SYNC and FREEZE

The control commands SYNC/UNSYNC

(SYNCHRONIZE/CANCEL SYNCHRONIZATION)

and FREEZE/UNFREEZE are broadcast functions.

SYNC/UNSYNC is used to transmit synchronized

control commands and/or speed reference

values to all connected slaves. FREEZE/UNFREEZE

is used to freeze the status actual value in the

slaves in order to receive a synchronized actual

value from all connected slaves.

The SYNC and FREEZE commands refer to the

PCD and PCV portions of the PPO.

VLT ® danfoss aqua drive PROFIBUS

SYNC/UNSYNC

By using SYNC/UNSYNC, simultaneous responses

of several slaves can be generated, e.g, danfoss aqua drive. synchronized

start, stop, or change of the speed. In the

event of a SYNC command, the current control

word and the speed reference value are frozen. Incoming

process data are saved, but are only applied

when a new SYNC command or d3d device error battlefield 3 UNSYNC

command is made.

The following example shows the speed reference

value sent by the master in the left column and the

respective effective speed reference value for the

three slaves in the three columns to the right.

Current speed reference value slave

VLT VLT VLT

From DP master to address: Address 3 Address 4 Address 5

1. Speed reference value = 50% to address 3 ⇒ 50 % 0 % 0 %

2, error 413. Speed error creatin bitmap value = 50% to address 4 50 % ⇒ 50 % 0 %

3. Speed reference value = 50% to address 5 50 % 50 % ⇒ 50 %

4. SYNC command to danfoss aqua drive addresses ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 50 %

5. Speed reference value = 75% to address 3 ⇒ 50 % 50 % 50 %

6. Speed reference value = 75% to address 4 50 % ⇒ 50 % 50 %

7. Speed reference value = 75% to address 5 50 % 50 % ⇒ 50 %

8. SYNC command to all addresses ⇒ 75 % ⇒ 75 % ⇒ 75 %

9. Speed reference value = 100% to address 3 ⇒ 75 % 75 % 75 %

10. Speed reference value = 50% to address 4 75 % ⇒ 75 % 75 %

11. Speed reference value = 25% to address 5 75 % 75 % ⇒ 75 %

12. UNSYNC command to all addresses ⇒ 100 % ⇒ 50 % ⇒ 25 %

13. Speed reference = 0% to address 3 ⇒ 0% 50% 25%

14. Speed reference = 0% to address 4 0 % ⇒ 0% 25%

15. Speed reference = 0% to address 5 0 % 0 % ⇒ 0%

FREEZE/UNFREEZE

By using FREEZE/UNFREEZE, simultaneous

reading of process data, e.g. output current, by

several slaves can be brought about. At a FREEZE

command, error 413, the actual current values are frozen.

When instructed, the slave will send back the

value in effect at the time the FREEZE command

was issued. The respective values are updated

when a new FREEZE command or an UNFREEZE

command is issued.

The following example shows the current values

read by the master in the left column and the

respective effective value of the output current for

the three slaves in the three columns to the right.

Actual output current slave

VLT VLT VLT

DP master reads address: Address 3 Address 4 Address 5

1. Address 3 output current = 2 A ⇐ 2A 3A 4A

2. Address 4 output current = 5 A 2 A ⇐ 5A 2A

3. Address 5 output current = 3 A 3 A 2 A ⇐ 3A

4, danfoss aqua drive. FREEZE command to all addresses ⇒ 1A ⇒ 3A ⇒ 3A

5. Address 3 output current = 1 A ⇐ 4A 2A 5A

6. Address 4 output current = 3 A 2 A ⇐ 2A 2A

7. Address 5 output current = 3 A 3 A 1 A ⇐ 2A

8, error 413. UNFREEZE command to all addresses

Readout same as for 1, 2 and 3

⇒ 2A ⇒ 3A ⇒ 4A

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 17

SYNC and FREEZE


Control word / Status word

■ Control word / status word

The bits of the ”control word” tell the VLT how to

respond, while the status of the bits in the ”status

word” transmits information about the VLT to the

master.

One can select through parameter 512 whether the

control word and status word are to be defined

according to ”Profidrive” (field bus) or according to

”FC Drive (Danfoss)”. ”FC Drive (Danfoss)” is the

factory setting.

■ Control word according to Profidrive standard

(Parameter 512 = field bus)

The control word is used to send commands from a

master (e.g. a Error 413 to a slave.

Master ➝ Slave

18

Control

word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Error 413 1 ON 1

01 OFF 2 ON 2

02 OFF 3 ON 3

03 Coasting No coasting

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Save output frequency Ramp possible

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Without function Reset

08 Jogging speed 1 OFF ON

09 Jogging speed 2 OFF ON

10 Data not valid Valid

11 Without function Frequ. correction

DOWN (reduce)

12 Without function Frequ. correction UP

(increase ref. value)

13 Selection setup 1 (lsb)

14 Selection setup 2 (msb)

15 Without function Reversion

If ”Profidrive” has been selected, then ftp error 530 jib, rf twopart

start command has to be observed when

the start is released (turn-on lock-out: bit 0).

For this it is necessary to first predetermine

Hex 047E and then Hex 047F in the control word,

for example.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Bus

reference

Control

word

Bus

reference

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 error 413 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

0 4 7 E (Hex)

0 4 7 F (Hex)

Bit 00, OFF error 413 1

Normal ramp stop using the linux error unknown filesystem times of the

parameters 207/208 or 209/210.

Bit 00 = “0” leads to the stop and activation of the

output relay 01 or 04 if the output frequency is

0 Hz if Relay 123 has been selected in parameter

323 or 326.

In the case of bit 00 = “1”, fatal error autocad 2012 frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 01, OFF 2/ON 2

Coasting stop

In the case of bit 01 = “0”, a coasting stop and

activation of the output relay 01 or 04 occurs if the

output frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

In danfoss aqua drive case of bit 01 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 02, OFF 3/ON 3

Quick stop using the ramp time of parameter 212.

In the case of bit 02 = “0”, a quick stop and activation

of the output relay 01 or 04 occurs if the

output frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

In the case of danfoss aqua drive 02 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Bit 03, Coasting/No coasting

Coasting stop

Bit 03 = “0” leads to a stop.

In the case of bit 03 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 502 determines

how bit 03 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

Bit 04, Quick stop/Ramp

Quick stop using the ramp time of parameter 212.

In the case of bit 04 = “0”, a quick stop occurs.

In the case of bit 04 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 503 determines

how bit 04 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Bit 05, Save output frequency/Ramp possible

In the case of bit 05 = “0”, danfoss aqua drive, the current output frequency

is being maintained even if danfoss aqua drive reference

value is modified.

In the case of bit 05 danfoss aqua drive “1”, error 413, the frequency converter

can perform its regulating function again; operation

occurs according to the respective reference value.

Bit 06, Ramp stop/Start

Normal ramp stop using the ramp times of the

parameters 207/208 or 209/210.

In addition, danfoss aqua drive, activation of the output relay 01 or error 413 if

the danfoss aqua drive frequency is 0 Hz if Relay 123 has been

selected in parameter 323 or 326.

Bit 06 = “0” leads to a stop.

In the case of bit 06 = “1”, the frequency converter

can start if the other start conditions are satisfied.

Note: The selection in parameter 505 determines

how bit 06 is linked with the corresponding function

of the digital inputs.

Bit 07, Without function/Reset

Reset after switching off.

In the case of bit 07 = “0”, no reset occurs.

In the case of a slope change of bit 07 to “1”, a

reset occurs after switching off.

Bit 08, Fixed speed 1 OFF/ON

Activation of the preprogrammed speed in parameter

509 (bus JOG 1). JOG 1 is only possible if

bit 04 = “0” and bit 00 - 03 = “1”.

Bit 09, error 413, Fixed speed 2 OFF/ON

Activation of the preprogrammed speed in parameter

510 (bus JOG 2). JOG 2 is only possible if

bit 04 = “0” and bit 00 - 03 = “1”.

If both JOG 1 and JOG 2 are activated (bit 08 and

09 = “1”), then JOG 1 has the higher priority, i.e.

the speed programmed in parameter error 413 will be

used.

Bit 10, Data jpeg error #42 valid/valid

Is used to notify the VLT5000 series whether the

process data channel (PCD) error 413 respond to

modifications by the master (bit 10 = 1) or not, error 413. The

function can be inverted in parameter 805.

NB!

In the case of bit 10 = 0, the VLT does not

respond to the control word or the main reference

value.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Bit 11, Without function/Frequency correction

DOWN

Is used to reduce the speed reference value by the

amount given in parameter 219.

In the case of bit 11 = “0”, no modification of the

reference value occurs.

In the case of bit 11 = “1”, the reference value is

reduced.

Bit 12, Without function/Frequency correction UP

Is used to increase the speed reference value by

the amount given in parameter 219.

In the case of bit 12 = “0”, no modification of the

reference value occurs.

In the case of bit 12 danfoss aqua drive “1”, the reference value is

increased.

If both – slowing down and accelerating – are

activated (bit 11 and 12 = ”1”), slowing down has

priority, i.e. the speed reference value will error 413 reduced.

Bit 13/14, Setup selection

Bit 13 and 14 are used to choose between the four

parameter setups according to the following table:

Setup Bit 14 Bit 13

1 0 0

2 0 1

3 1 0

4 1 1

The function is only possible if External Selection

has been chosen in parameter 004.

The selection in parameter 507 determines how bit

13/14 is linked with the corresponding function of

the digital inputs.

Bit 15, Without function/Reversion

Reversion of the rotational direction of the motor.

In the case of bit 15 = “0”, error 413, no reversion occurs.

In the case of bit 15 = “1”, danfoss aqua drive, a reversion takes place.

Please note that the reversion in the factory setting

in parameter 506 has been selected as ”terminal”.

Bit 15 only causes a reversion if bus, bus or terminal

or bus and terminal has been selected (bus and

terminal only in connection with terminal 9, however).

NB!

Unless otherwise indicated, the bit of the control

word is linked error 413 the corresponding

function of the digital inputs as a logical ”or” function.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 19

Control word / Status word


Control word / Status word

■ Status word according to Profidrive standard

The status word is used to notify a master (e.g. a

PC) about the status of a slave

Slave ➝ Master

20

Status

word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit = 1

00 Control not ready Ready

01 VLT not ready Ready

02 Coasting Enable

03 No error Trip

04 ON 2 OFF 2

05 ON 3 OFF 3

06 Start possible Start not possible

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference

09 Local operation Bus control

10 Not in operating range Frequency limit OK

11 No operation Operation

12 VLT OK Stopped, autostart

13 Voltage OK Limit exceeded

14 Torque OK Limit exceeded

15 Timer OK Limit exceeded

Bit 00, Control not ready/ready

In the case of bit 00 = “0”, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “0” (OFF 1, OFF 2 or OFF 3) – or

the frequency converter has switched off (trip).

In the case of bit 00 = “1”, danfoss aqua drive, the frequency converter

control is ready, but there is not necessarily a

supply to the power unit present (in the case of

external 24 V supply of the control system).

Bit 01, VLT not ready/ready

Same significance as bit 00, however, error 413, there is a

supply of the power unit. The frequency converter

is ready error 413 it receives the necessary start

signals.

Bit 02, Coasting/Enable

In the case of bit 02 danfoss aqua drive “0”, error 413, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “0” (OFF 1, Danfoss aqua drive 2 or OFF 3 or

coasting) – or the frequency converter has

switched off (trip).

In the mysql iserror in php of bit 02 = “1”, bit 00, 01 or 02 of the

control word is “1”; the frequency converter has not

tripped.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Output

frequency

Bit 03, No error/Trip

In the case of bit 03 = “0”, no error condition of the

frequency converter exists.

In the case of bit 03 = “1”, the frequency converter

has tripped and requires error 413 reset signal before it

can start.

Bit 04, error 413, ON 2/OFF 2

In the case of bit 04 = “0”, bit 01 of the control

word is “1”

In the case of bit 04 = “1”, bit 01 of the control

word is “0”

Bit 05, ON 3/OFF 3

In the case of bit 05 = “0”, bit 02 of the control

word is “1”

In the case of bit 05 = “1”, bit 02 of the control

word is “0”

Bit 06, Start possible/Start not possible

Bit 06 is always ”0” if FC Drive has been selected

in parameter 512. If Profidrive has been selected in

parameter 512, bit 06 will be ”1” after a switch-off

acknowledgement, after activation of OFF2 or

OFF3, and after switching on the mains voltage.

Start not possible will be rabbitmq cannot_accept error emfile, with bit 00 of the

control word being set to ”0” and bit 01, 02 and 10

being set to ”1”.

Bit 07, No warning/Warning

In the case of bit 07 = “0”, no unusual situation

exists. In the case of bit 07 = “1”, an unusual status

of the frequency converter has occurred. All warnings

are described in the operations manual.

Bit 08, Speed ≠ reference / Speed = reference

In the case of bit 08 = “0”, the current speed of the

motor deviates from the set speed reference value.

This may occur, for example, when the speed is

being changed during start/stop through ramp up/

down.

In the case of bit 08 = “1”, the current speed of the

motor corresponds to the set speed reference

value.

Bit 09, Local operation/Bus control

Bit 09 = “0” indicates that the frequency converter

has been stopped by means of the stop switch of

the control panel, or that Local has been selected

in parameter 002.

In the case of bit 09 = “1”, the frequency converter

can be controlled through the serial interface.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


Bit 10, Not in operating range/Frequency limit OK

In the case of bit 10 = “0”, the output frequency is

outside the limits set in parameter 225 and parameter

226 (Warnings: frequency low or frequency

high).

In the case of bit 10 = “1”, the output frequency is

within the indicated limits.

Bit 11, No operation/Operation

In the case of bit 11 = “0”, the motor does not turn.

In the case of bit 11 = “1”, the frequency converter

has a start signal, danfoss aqua drive, or the output frequency is higher

than 0 Hz.

Bit 12, VLT OK/Stopped, autostart

In the case of bit 12 danfoss aqua drive “0”, there is no temporary

overloading of the error 413 the case of bit 12 = “1”, error 413, the inverter has stopped

due to overloading, error 413. However, the frequency

converter has not switched off (trip) and will start

again after the overloading has ended.

Bit 13, Voltage OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 13 = “0”, the voltage limits of the

frequency converter are not exceeded.

In the case of bit 13 = “1”, the direct voltage in the

intermediate circuit of the frequency converter is

too low or too high.

Bit 14, Moment OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 14 = “0”, the motor current is below

the moment limit selected in parameter 221.

In the case of bit 14 = “1”, the moment limit selected

in parameter 221 is exceeded.

Bit 15, Timer OK/Limit exceeded

In the case of bit 15 = “0”, the timers for the thermal

motor protection and thermal VLT protection

(description on page danfoss aqua drive have not exceeded 100%.

In the case of bit 15 = “1”, one of the timers has

exceeded 100%.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Control word according to VLT standard

(Parameter 512 = FC Drive)

The control word is used to send commands from a

master (e.g. a PC) to a slave.

Master➝ Slave

Control

word

Bus

reference

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Reference value external

selection lsb

01 Reference value external

selection msb

02 DC brake Ramp

03 Freewheel No freewheel

04 Quick stop Ramp

05 Holding Ramp possible

06 Ramp stop Start

07 Without function Reset

08 Without function Jog

09 Ramp 1 Ramp 2

10 Data not valid Valid

11 Without function Relay 01 active

12 Without function Relay 04 active

13 Parameter setup

selection lsb

14 Parameter setup

selection msb

15 Without function Reversion

Bit 00/01

The danfoss aqua drive 00 and 01 are used to choose between

the four preprogrammed reference values (parameters

215-218)

according to the following table:

Progr. ref. val. Parameter Bit 01 Bit 00

1 215 0 0

2 216 0 1

3 217 1 0

4 218 1 1

Bit 02, DC brake

Bit 02 = “0” leads to direct voltage braking and

stop. Braking current and duration are set in parameter

125 and 126.

Bit 02 = “1” results in Ramp.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 21

Control word / Status word


Control word / Status word

Bit 08, Activation of the fixed speed in

parameter 213

In the case of bit 08 = “0”, the fixed speed will not

be activated.

In the case of bit 08 = “1”, the motor runs at the

fixed speed.

Bit 09, Ramp selection 1/2

In the case of bit 09 = “0”, ramp 1 is active (parameter

207/208).

In the case of bit 09 = “1”, ramp 2 is active (parameter

209/210).

Bit 11, Relay 01

Bit 11 = “0”: Relay 01 is not activated.

Bit 11 = “1”: Relay 01 is activated, on the pre-condition

that control word bit was selected in parameter

323.

Bit 12, Relay 04

Bit 12 = “0”: Relay 04 is not activated.

Bit 12 = “1”: Relay 04 is activated, on the pre-condition

that control word bit was selected in parameter

326.

22

The description of the other bits can be

found in the section ”control word according

to Profidrive”.

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

■ Status word according to VLT standard

The status word is used to notify a master (e.g. a

PC) about the status of a slave.

Slave➝ Master

Status

word

Output

frequency

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

Bit Bit = 0 Bit =1

00 Control not ready Ready

01 VLT not ready Ready

02 Coasting Enable

03 No error Trip

04 R e s e r v e d

05 R e s e r v e danfoss aqua drive R e s e r v e d

07 No warning Warning

08 Speed ≠ reference Speed = reference

09 Local operation Bus control

10 Not in operating range Frequency limit OK

11 No operation Operation

12 VLT OK Stopped, autostart

13 Voltage OK Limit exceeded

14 Torque OK Limit exceeded

15 Timer OK Limit exceeded

Bit 00, danfoss aqua drive, Control not ready/ready

Bit 00 = ”0” means that the frequency converter

has switched off due to malfunction.

Bit 00 = ”1” means that the frequency converter

control is ready, danfoss aqua drive, but that there is not necessarily a

supply to the power unit present (in the case of

external 24 V supply of the control card).

Bit 02, Coasting/Enable

Bit 02 = ”0” means that the bit 03 of the control

word is ”0” (Coasting) or that the frequency converter

has tripped.

Bit 02 = ”1” means that the bit 03 of the control

word is ”1” and that danfoss aqua drive frequency converter has

not tripped.

The description of the other bits can be

found in the section ”status word according

to Profidrive”.

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark


■ Bus reference value

Control

word

VLT ® 5000/5000Flux/6000HVAC/8000AQUA PROFIBUS

Master➝ Slave

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The frequency reference value is transmitted to the

frequency converter in the form of a 16-bit word.

The value is transmitted in integers (0-32767).

16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%, danfoss aqua drive. (Negative

numbers are formed with the aid of the two’s complement.)

The bus reference value has the following format:

Parameter 203 = ”0”

“refMIN-refMAX” 0-16384 (4000 Hex) ~ 0-100% ~ refMIN - refMAX

Parameter 203 = “1”

-refMAX - +refMAX

-16384 (. . Hex) - +16384 (4000 Hex) ~

-100 - +100% ~ -ref MAX - +ref MAX

Current output frequency

Status

word

Bus

reference

Output

frequency

Slave➝ Master

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.

The value of the current output frequency of the

frequency converter is transmitted in the form of a

16-bit word, error 413. The value is transmitted in integers

(0-32767). 16384 (4000 Hex) corresponds to 100%.

(Negative numbers are formed with the aid of the

two’s complement.)

MG.90.D1.22 – VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 23

Bus reference value


Examples

■ Examples

■ Example 1: PCV portion and control word /

reference value

Example for the application of type 1 PPOs to

modify the ramp rise build-up time (parameter 207)

to 10 s and to trigger a start and a speed control of

50% (parameter 512: FC profile = factory setting).

NB!

Modified parameters are only stored permanently

(protected against a mains failure) in

the EEProm of the VLT if parameter 971 is triggered

after the parameter modification.

PPO, danfoss aqua drive, Parameter Process Data Object

PCD Process Data

PCV Parameter Characteristics Value

PCA Parameter Characteristics (bytes 1, error 413, 2)

PCA processing see below

IND Subindex (byte 3), (byte 4 not utilized)

PVA Parameter Value (bytes 5 to 8)

CTW Control Word

Similar video

Danfoss Drives - Basic Troubleshooting of VLT Series Drives

0 Comments

Leave a Comment